Home

Avaya Using Technician Interface Software User's Manual

1. Table 7 13 Technician Interface Access Levels continued Command User Manager octetfmt see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v on y v osi Isp v v osidata v v partition v v password Manager v password User v v pause see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v ping y v pktdump see Troubleshooting Routers y printf see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v prom y readexe v v record v reset v restart v return see Writing Technician Interface Scripts y v run see Writing Technician Interface Scripts y v save aliases v save config v save env see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v save log v set v setenv see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v show see Using Technician Interface Scripts v v continued 7 86 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Table 7 13 Technician Interface Access Levels continued Command User Manager source aliases v source env see Writing Technician Interface Scripts sprintf see Writing Technician Interface Scripts stamp string v v v system S telnet S tftp type unalias unsetenv see Writing Technician Interface Scripts verbose wfsnmpkey Se eS wfsnmpmode wfsnmpseed xmodem S NN STON STS SPR OS ORR SRS 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 8 Managing Aliases An alias is a command you create to take the place
2. Table 7 1 Options for the bconfig Command Option Description image Specifies information about the router s software image config Specifies information about the router s configuration file local Indicates that the specified file image or config resides in the router s local file system network Indicates that the specified file resides on a network server lt TFTP_host gt Specifies the IP address of the host where the image or configuration file resides If both files reside on the network they must also reside on the same host In other words you must specify the same IP address for the TFTP host for both files lt TFTP_pathname gt Specifies the complete path name of the software image or configuration file on the host d Resets the default values for the software image or configuration file as follows bconfig d image tells the router to look for the image file locally and nullifies the IP address and path name for the file bconfig d config tells the router to obtain the configuration file over the network and nullifies the IP address and path name for the file Without the IP address and path names the router uses Netboot rather than Directed Netboot However if you want to get one file locally while using Directed Netboot for the other file use the bconfig commands as follows bconfig image local bconfig config network 21 3 5 62 usr anstartup config or bconfig image network
3. 4 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System When you delete a file on a memory card the file becomes inaccessible but the data remains on the card Eventually all space is used The compact command copies the active files to memory erases the memory card and copies the files back to the memory card This command frees up space to prevent or respond to a file allocation failure See Compacting File Space on page 4 18 for more information about this feature Displaying a Directory Use the dir command to display a list of the files on a particular volume You can enter the wildcard characters and to display file names with the character strings you specify Enter the following to list the files stored on the active volume dir Enter the following to list the files stored on a different volume where lt vol gt is the slot number containing the volume dir lt vol gt The directory display shows an entry for each file on the volume Each entry consists of a file name size and modification date weekday time Figure 4 2 shows a sample response to the dir command on a BLN 308657 14 00 Rev 00 4 7 Using Technician Interface Software dir Volume in drive 5 is Directory of 5 File Name Size Date Day Time pvc0 cfg 6872 10 14 94 Fri 13351312 freal S6T6 O9 167 94 Fri 08 04 26 fr VIII 10158 09 28 94 Wed 15 25 48 mfg log 172052 11 03 94 Thurs 16 24 28 config 7132 11 11 94
4. The table is the default but not initial source for a slot to look up routing information necessary to forward locally received packets Each routing table continuously receives from IP and all other nonmulticast IP protocols configured on the router updates on routes added changed or deleted in your network By means of this continuous high speed internal update mechanism the system synchronizes the contents of routing tables on all slots The only exceptions to this rule or slot reset operation occur during the first 10 seconds of a router boot 7 68 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Unlike the show ip script command which retrieves from the router s active MIB an aggregated view of data from IP routing tables and internal caches across all slots the Technician Interface ip command retrieves the contents of the routing table on a single slot that you specify For this reason the ip command retrieves information significantly faster than the show ip command With the ip command you can examine e The entire contents of the routing table on any slot e A subset of the total contents of the routing table on any slot You limit the view of a routing table by applying filters subcommand options and flags to the ip command syntax For example you can enter ip routes lt s gt where lt s gt is a slot number you specify Note RIP and EGP routes are refreshed only on a slot that receive
5. Enter the following command to display data in long format for all RIPv6 routes pointing out interface 2 ip6 routes l pRIP i2 Next Hop Prefix Protocol Intf Weight 3FFE 1300 0002 0100 0000 64 RIPv6 2 0x739c0002 RIPv6 Metric 2 Nexthop FE80 0200 A2FF FE0B AE7E Last updated 96387 seconds ago 3FFE 1300 0002 0101 0000 64 RIPv6 2 0x739c0002 RIPv6 Metric 2 Nexthop FE80 0200 A2FF FE0B AE7E Last updated 96387 seconds ago 3FFE 1300 0002 0102 0000 64 RIPv6 2 0x739c0002 RIPv6 Metric 2 Nexthop FE80 0200 A2FF FE0B AE7E Last updated 96387 seconds ago Obtaining IPv6 Interface Statistics The ip6 stats command displays version 6 statistics for all interfaces by not specifying an interface index or a specific interface on the device 7 82 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Example ip6 stats lt ifindex gt Enter the following command to display data for interface 1 on the device ip6 stats 1 Interface 1 PPP to Quincy_Adams is Up Link PPP at 64102 bps circuit 3 Neighbor Discovery Off Router Advertisements Off Address es FE80 0001 A2B0 1FBE link local Rx 434756 Tx 441626 Drop 0 Err 0 Icmp In DestUnr 0 TimeExc 0 ParmProb 0 TooBig 0 Icmp Out DestUnr 0 TimeExc 0 ParmProb 0 TooBig 0 Icmp In Echos 0 EchoRep 0 RS 0 RA 0 NS 0 NA O Icmp Out Echos 0 EchoRep 0 RS 0 RA 0 NS 0 NA O Setting Modem Initialization Strings Several AT modem commands contain a dollar sign
6. p generates a path trace report that displays the intervening hop addresses to the destination and the time that it took to reach them lt address gt is the source address v verbose generates statistical information about the ICMP echo request including information about the success rate and round trip time Note The Nortel Networks implementation of the ICMP protocol does not support loopback pinging your own system or broadcast addresses The console displays one of the following messages when you issue a ping command If you enter a value in the lt repeat_count gt argument the system displays one of the following messages for the default ping plus one for each additional ping e Analive message This message appears if the system receives an ICMP echo response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed The message also indicates the size of the test packet A sample message follows ping 192 32 1 151 is alive size 16 bytes e Adoes not respond message This message appears if the system does not receive an ICMP echo response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows ping 193 32 1 151 does not respond 3 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands e AMiIcMP host unreachable from y y y y message This message appears if the local Nortel Networks router or remote router whose address is y y y y cannot forward the ping request any furth
7. Enter the following command to boot the entire system with the default software image for example bn exe and default configuration file config boot 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration You can also boot the entire system by naming a specific image or configuration file With this named boot operation the system uses the image or configuration file name that you specify instead of the default image or configuration file Use the following syntax to perform a named boot operation boot lt vol gt lt image_name gt lt vol gt lt config_name gt boot lt vol gt lt vol gt lt config_name gt boot lt vol gt lt image_name gt lt vol gt lt vol gt identifies the volume that contains the lt image_name gt lt image_name gt identifies the file name of the router software image or identifies the default router software image lt vol gt identifies the volume that contains the lt config_name gt lt config_name gt identifies the name of the configuration file or identifies the default configuration file config Note You must specify both the image and configuration file in the boot command even when you want to use a default file For example if you want to use the default router software image with a named configuration file you must enter a dash as the image argument Similarly to use a named router software image with the default configuration file you mus
8. Login privileges granted ii SecurlD server Figure 1 1 SecurID Login Procedure and Interface Dialog From Figure 1 2 TS0007B 1 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Card is in new PIN mode Enter a passcode after the Enter Passcode prompt Erom from the router Figure 1 1 Login lt User Manager gt Password lt password gt Enter Passcode lt cardcode gt New PIN required Do you wish to no continue yes no Introducing the Technician Interface System configured to Are you authorized generate new PINs containing digits only to select your own PIN alphanumeric characters or digits only A alphanumeric characters lt Return gt to generate a new PIN Enter your new PIN and display it on the screen containing x characters Enter your new PIN containing x digits Go to 8 lt M New PIN accepted Figure 1 1 The SecurlD Server accepted your New PIN rejected yes no now rn pretoco sorte TS0008A Figure 1 2 SecurlD PIN Assignment Procedure and Interface Dialog 1 9 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Technician Interface Welcome Screen When you initially boot a router during installation using the configuration file ti cfg you receive login prompt on your console display or Telnet connection For example booting from a console locally connected to Serial Port 1 of a router in
9. A slot number for example wfHwEntry wfHwDiagPromSource 2 identifies slot 2 A path name that contains the version number of the image stored in a diagnostics PROM for example harpdiag rel v4 00 wf p3j harpoon ss image p frediag exe identifies the v4 00 Version 4 0 diagnostics PROM image frediag exe in slot 2 m Command Note Before upgrading any router software always save copies of the original configuration file and boot image as a safeguard in case you encounter problems during the procedure To 1 upgrade the PROMs Insert a flash card with contiguous free space sufficient to accommodate the PROM images you want to use as source files for upgrading boot or diagnostic PROMs on one or more slots To determine the amount of contiguous free space display the directory of the flash volume by entering the following command from the Technician Interface prompt dir lt volume_no gt 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 35 Using Technician Interface Software If you need more contiguous free space for the image e Delete unnecessary or obsolete files e Compact the contents of the flash card 2 Transfer the PROM image files for example freboot exe and frediag exe to the flash card From the Technician Interface use the tftp command See In Band File Transfers in Chapter 4 if you need more information 3 Establish a Technician Interface session with the router See Chapter 1 if
10. Clearing events from the events log buffer is useful if you want to conduct an experiment and examine the events log afterwards Note You may want to save the log to a file for later retrieval before clearing it See Saving the Events Log on page 5 7 Enter the clearlog command with one or more of the following parameters to clear all events from an event buffer or buffers where lt s ot_no gt is the location of the log buffer you are clearing clearlog lt s ot_no gt clearlog lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt clearlog lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt The system automatically clears all events from the buffer associated with the slot or slots you indicate Examples clearlog Clears all events from memory clearlog 2 Clears all events from the slot 2 event buffer clearlog 5 7 Clears all events from the slot 5 6 and 7 event buffers clearlog 2 5 8 Clears all events from the slot 2 5 and 8 event buffers 308657 14 00 Rev 00 5 13 Chapter 6 Accessing the MIB You can use the Technician Interface to access and manage the Nortel Networks management information base MIB This chapter assumes you already know how to manage the MIB but you need instructions on entering MIB management commands at the Technician Interface console See Appendix A for more information You can manage the Nortel Networks MIB as follows e Display MIB object names identifiers and values e Change MIB values e Commit
11. e A subset of the total contents of the cache on any slot To view the internal cache on any slot enter the ip command using the following syntax ip cache 255 255 255 255 lt s gt lt S gt is a slot number 255 255 255 255 is the default address bit mask for the internal cache on any slot 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 71 Using Technician Interface Software DVMRP Caches With the ip command you can examine the contents of the DVMRP cache on any slot that you specify To view the DVMRP cache for any DVMRP slot on the router enter the ip command using the following syntax ip dvmrp_caches s lt s of gt lt slot gt is the slot number associated with the DVMRP cache you want to examine You must enter a slot number for the ip dvmrp_caches command Example The following ip command displays the DVMRP cache information only for slot 2 on the router ip dvmrp_caches s2 group in slot vif_id pruned not_pruned src out cct A I active not 224 5 5 22 in 2 2 0 0 not pruned 92 32 30 182 27 out 4A 31 11 224 5 5 3 in 2 2 0 0 not pruned 92 32 302192 27 out 4A 31 11 224 5 5 4 in 2 2 0 0 not pruned 92 32 30 192 27 out 4A 31 1I 22525 2D in 2 2 0 0 not pruned G2 32530 192 27 out 4I 3I 11 224 5 5 6 in 2 2 0 0 not pruned For each incoming circuit the dvmrp_caches command indicates the incoming slot number vif_id circuit number the local and remote tunnel IP addresses when tunnelling and if DVMRP ha
12. e CSMACD e TCP e IP TFTP e IPX e SNMP e FR e SYNC FTP TELNET You can also use menus described in Using Technician Interface Scripts as an alternative way of accessing the full set of scripts 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 2 Configuring the Console Port To configure a router s console port parameters using the Technician Interface you have to change the default parameter settings associated with the console port on the back of the router You can change the default parameter settings for the console port associated with the following boards e System Resources Link Module SRM L board found in the BLN BLN 2 and BCN routers e Primary processor board found in the AN and ASN routers e Base module found in ARN routers The autoscript feature allows you to automatically execute certain Technician Interface commands when you log in as either a Manager or User Note You can use the console port to connect either a console or modem to the router 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 1 Using Technician Interface Software Overview You access the Technician Interface software through a console or modem attached to a router serial port The number of Technician Interface sessions you can establish for a router depends on the number of serial ports available on that router e The SRM L board has one serial port labeled Console allowing you to establish one session on a Backbone Node platform e The
13. linkDown Issued when the network management entity initializes The cold start trap is delayed up to 30 seconds to give the network interfaces time to initialize thus improving the chances that the trap will be received by all the registered managers of this device Issued when the management protocol is reenabled after being disabled Issued when an interface has been initialized and is providing service to upper layers Note that during system initialization the transmission of link traps may be masked because the network layer may not be fully initialized and ready to send traps Issued when an interface is no longer providing service 308657 14 00 Rev 00 A 9 Using Technician Interface Software authenticationFailure egpNeighborLoss enterpriseSpecific Unsupported Operations Issued when an SNMP access occurs An invalid access occurs if a bad community or illegal manager address is used Authentication traps will be masked if they are not enabled Issued when an acquired EGP neighbor is lost All Nortel Networks router system log events can be sent as traps They must be configured through the wfSnmpTrapEntityTable and the wfSnmpTrapEventTable The specific trap value is a 4 byte value The first most significant byte indicates the slot generating the event the second byte indicates the severity debug 1 informational 2 warning 4 fault 8 and trace 16 the third byte indicates an entity
14. Copying a File Use the copy command to make a copy of a file You can use the wildcard characters and when issuing the copy command to copy multiple files Caution The system automatically overwrites any file already on the volume that has the same file name as the file you are creating To avoid overwriting an existing file display a directory of the volume s contents and determine the file names that are already in use Enter the following to copy a file on the active volume copy lt old_file gt lt new_file gt Enter the following to copy a file to a different volume copy lt vol gt lt old_file gt lt vol gt lt new_file gt lt vol gt in lt vol gt lt old_file gt is the slot number of the source volume lt vol gt in lt vol gt lt new_file gt is the slot number of the target volume 308657 14 00 Rev 00 4 11 Using Technician Interface Software Transferring a File Depending on conditions existing within your network you can transfer files between Nortel Networks routers and remote workstations using either of two methods e In band using Technician Interface tftp commands and a route through your high speed IP network e Out of band using Technician Interface xmodem commands and a route through a lower speed dial network You can transfer a file in band whenever e You can dial in to the Technician Interface port of a router you choose as source or destination for a file transfer ope
15. The router substitutes for slot the number of the actual slot where the session is running on the router For more information on how to configure the Telnet prompt on a router see Configuring IP Utilities Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Login Timeout wfSerialPortLoginTimeOut 16 1 min 1 to 99 min 99 indicates infinity Specifies the number of minutes the Technician Interface waits to time out when no one has pressed the enter key after the Login prompt This parameter is valid only when Modem Enable is set to 1 Enable The Technician Interface hangs up the phone when the timeout value is exceeded Accept the default 1 minute or specify a different timeout value set wfSerialPortEntry 16 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 16 2 12 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Configuring the Console Port Password Timeout wfSerialPortPasswordTimeOut 17 1 min 1 to 99 min 99 indicates infinity Specifies the number of minutes the Technician Interface waits to time out when no one has pressed the enter key after the Password prompt This parameter is valid only when Mode
16. Using Technician Interface Software Debugging with Predefined Aliases This section describes how to use aliases that are useful for debugging common network problems These aliases are located in the debug al file Enter the following to load the aliases that are predefined for debugging where lt vol gt is the volume containing the files from Nortel Networks source aliases lt vo gt debug al Note You can also use run lt vol gt debug al Table 8 1 shows each alias and its associated function To invoke an alias enter the alias after the Technician Interface prompt Follow the alias with a space and the parameter indicated if applicable The console displays the data associated with the alias You can display the commands associated with an alias loaded in memory in two ways e You can use the alias command to display the commands without invoking them e You can use the verbose command to display the commands associated with an alias whenever an alias executes Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems If you enter The system at_intf lt circuit gt 1 l 2 Enables or disables a circuit Valid values are 1 Enable circuit 2 Disable circuit at_if lt circuit_no gt Retrieves configuration information and statistics for the selected circuit at_addr Lists the AppleTalk addresses for the AppleTalk interfaces on the router at_cfg Displays the configured network start network en
17. iso org dod internet private enterprises wellfleet The corresponding numeric identifier assigned to the Nortel Networks router MIB subtree is as follows 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 Figure A 1 shows an example of the hierarchy of objects The prefix that precedes each object name identifies a Nortel Networks enterprise specific object The wfSwSeries7 wellfleet 3 object names and identifies the Nortel Networks router MIB for the Series 7 and later software The nodes in the first level below wfSwSeries7 are as follows e wfHardwareConfig wfSwSeries7 1 contains the objects that pertain to the hardware configuration e wfSoftwareConfig wfSwSeries7 2 contains the objects that pertain to software that is loaded such as protocols and drivers and information required for loading such as where in memory a driver gets loaded e wfSystem wfSwSeries7 3 contains the objects that pertain to the system record console remote console and the circuit name table e wfLine wfSwSeries7 4 contains the objects that determine the functioning of the drivers that control the data link layer media e wfApplication wfSwSeries7 5 contains the protocol applications A 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using the Nortel Networks Router MIB wellfleet enterprises 18 wfSwSeries7 wellfleet 3 wfHardwareConfig wfSwSeries7 1 wfHwModuleGroup wfHardwareConfig 4 wfHwidentities wfHardwareConfig 5 wfHwFn wfHwidentities 1 wfHwLn wfHwldentities 2 wfHw
18. or backslash The Technician Interface uses the to reference a variable and the to prevent the substitution of a variable If one of these symbols appears in the wfModemEntry wfModemCfgInitString initialization command the Technician Interface does not set the string For example 1 1 get wfModem wfModem Entry wf 1 1 set wfModem ATSSB64000 commi odemCfgInitString 1 2 Entry wfModemCfgInitString 1 2 ATE Entry wfModemCfgInitString 1 2 Variable Undefined Variable SB64000 The Technician Interface interprets the command as containing an undefined variable and does not change the MIB value To set the MIB variable you must add a backslash in front of the symbol causing the confusion that is the or For example 1 1 get wfModemEntry wfModemCfgInitString 1 2 wfModem Entry wfModemCfgInitString 1 2 ATE 1 1 set wfModemEntry wfModemCfgInitString 1 2 AT SSB64000 commit 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 83 Using Technician Interface Software Technician Interface Commands and Access Levels The Technician Interface provides two access levels e User access level accepts read only commands e Manager access level accepts all Technician Interface commands Table 7 13 lists all Technician Interface commands and their associated access levels Table 7 13 Technician Interface Access Levels Command User Manager l v alias arrayenv see Writing
19. ospf_intf Reports the state of all the router s OSPF interfaces including virtual links The states are 1 Down 2 Loopback 3 Waiting 4 Point to point 5 Designated router 6 Backup designated router 7 Other designated router ospf_Isdb Lists all interfaces in the link state database ospf_nbrs Reports the state of every OSPF neighbor that the router knows about The states are 1 Down 2 Attempt 3 Init 4 Two way 5 Exchange start 6 Exchange 7 Loading 8 Full protocols Displays bit map in decimal form representing all protocols running and their associated slots setvol lt s ot_no gt Sets the active volume for TFTP puts and gets shovol snmpbase Displays the current active volume for TFTP puts and gets Displays all SNMP configuration parameters base record sr_intf lt instance_ID gt Enables or disables source routing for a specific interface 1 Enable 2 Disable sr_info Displays the contents of the source routing database record sr_cctstats lt circuit_no gt Displays the status of the specified circuit stid Displays the spanning tree node identifier continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 17 Using Technician Interface Software Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system stif lt index gt Displays all spanning tree bridge information for the learning br
20. 1 type 0 slot 2 mod 1 conn 01 This is the only line on the first CSMACD connector on module 1 of slot 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Appendix B Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files This appendix describes how to use the xmodem command to perform out of band file transfers The xmodem command enables you to transfer files between remote workstations and Nortel Networks routers when all IP routing paths between them are down You cannot use the xmodem command to transfer files between Nortel Networks routers Overview Both UNIX and remote PC workstations allow you to log in to the Technician Interface port of a router and enter xmodem commands However each type of workstation uses a different utility program for opening and closing out of band dial connections between workstation and router With a Sun workstation you initially establish a connection by configuring and running the Terminal Interface Program TIP The program has two associated files etc phones and etc remote in which you can enter setup information such as the telephone number of a remote router etc phones and modem interface settings etc remote You run the program by entering a tip command with appropriate syntax at the UNIX command line prompt With a PC workstation you initially establish a connection by configuring and running the Nortel Networks Terminal Program file name wfterm To run the program click on the Wfterm icon in the d
21. Create a wildcard filter to forward events of type fault warning and debug on slots 2 3 4 5 a Create the filter as follows set wiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrDelete lt Host_IP_Address gt 255 1 1 commit lt Host_IP_Address gt is the address of the remote host associated with this filter 255 is the wildcard entity number 1 represents the index number of the filter commit commits router system resources to the filter you are creating Define the wildcard setting for filtering by event numbers The setting causes Syslog to ignore event numbers as a filtering criterion and to use instead message severity levels as a filtering criterion set wfSyslogEntFlitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd 192 32 6 14 255 1 0 set wfSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd 192 32 6 14 255 1 255 Define a set of message severity levels a severity mask that causes Syslog to select and forward only messages that have a severity level of fault warning or debug set wfiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSevMask 192 32 6 14 255 1 fwd The next two commands define the range of slots 2 to 4 as an additional filtering criterion The commands cause Syslog to select only messages logged on slots 2 to 5 set wfSyslogEntFitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd 192 32 6 14 255 1 2 set wfSyslogEntFlitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowUpp 192 32 6 14 255 1 4 commit 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 25
22. TR 130 130 130 130 130 NextHop Address 192 432 175 129 19232 192 32 192 32 T9232 192732 r923 2e 7 Routes To 192 32 175 129 192 32 175 130 LS Type Link State ID Adv Example ospf_Isdb LID LTOs Lise Lis 175 1 Lise 29 29 129 29 29 IGP 5 IGP IGP IGP INC INC EGP 0 INC 2 Define a command to display the OSPF Link State Database for type 1 link states in area 0 0 0 0 ip ospf_Isdb t1 a0 0 0 0 The following is a typical response from the router Router 192 32 174 62 Router 192 32 174 65 Router 192 32 174 66 Router 192 192 192 Metric 32 174 62 100 32 174 65 1 325 174 66 1 ASE Fwd Addr Age Seq Nbr 1904 80000009 1773 8000000b 1707 8000000c 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 63 Using Technician Interface Software The column headings in screens invoked by the ip command have the following meanings asterisk Indicates routes actively used by IP versus routes not currently used The asterisk appears only when you specify the all routes A flag Adv Router Indicates the OSPF router ID of the advertisement s originator For router links advertisements this field is identical to the Link State ID field The network s designated router originates network link advertisements Area border routers originate summary link advertisements AS boundary routers originate AS external link advertisements Age Number of
23. The following sections describe e The procedure the router uses to ping a remote device running a given protocol e The syntax of the ping command for each protocol e The possible messages displayed when you issue the ping command Note The ping command is not case sensitive IP Ping When you issue the ping command for IP the ping program sends an Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo request to the remote IP address you specify The remote device responds if it can be reached and the console displays the response or the result of the request Enter the following to ping a remote device running IP ping ip lt P_address gt t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt p a lt address gt v lt P_address gt is the required IP address in dotted decimal notation of the remote device 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 7 Using Technician Interface Software t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt p a lt address gt v are optional These parameters are as follows lt timeout gt is the number of seconds for each ping to time out If the system receives a response to a ping after it has timed out the system does not send an alive message to the console The default is 5 lt repeat_count gt is the number of ping messages to send Enter a value from 0 to 10 The default is 1 lt size gt is the number of bytes of data to send with each ping The default is 16
24. The following represents the syntax of the xmodem command xmodem sb st rb rt lt y m k c w p e n gt lt voldir gt lt filename gt lt filename gt fot CO Command Subcommands Options Source volume Files to send and source directory or Files to receive or Files to receive as TS0020B 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 3 Using Technician Interface Software Note You can enter the xmodem command line parameters and option flag characters in upper or lower case Do not insert spaces between parameter characters between option flag characters or between a parameter and an option flag character Do insert a space after the last option flag and between file names for YMODEM batch file transfers For out of band file transfer operations use only the xmodem command parameters and options that are appropriate for e The YMODEM protocol e The type of file you need to transfer The relevant xmodem command parameters are sb send binary and rb receive binary The relevant option flags are y ymodem logging w wait before initiating transfer p print display xmodem information and events n allow midtransfer cancel and e disable EOT verification DOS only The y and w option flags are required in the xmodem commands to select YMODEM and for proper handshaking with the YMODEM protocol program running on the remote workstation You should use the p option to monitor the progress of any out of ba
25. Using Technician Interface Software 2 1 atmarp table v 128 185 97 73 Vpi vci Atm address IP addressLife 0 63 39000000000000000000000000 0000a20d74aa01 128 185 97 74 399 2 1 atmarp table a 128 185 97 73 ATM address Vpi vci 39000000000000000000000000 0000a20d74aa01 0 63 Examples client 2 1 atmarp table v 128 185 97 74 Vpi vci Atm address IP address Life 0 63 39000000000000000000000000 00979797979700 2 1 atmarp table a 128 185 97 74 ATM address Vpi vci 39000000000000000000000000 00979797979700 0 63 3 30 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 4 Managing a Nonvolatile File System You can use the Technician Interface to manage nonvolatile file system NVFS files on a Nortel Networks router When you manage an NVFS you can e Use multiple memory cards e Name files e Display the status of each memory card installed in the router e Display a directory e Change the active volume e Copy a file from one volume to another or to the same volume e Transfer a file e Display the contents of a file e Delete a file e Compact file space e Format a memory card e Partition a memory card or SIMM Note The NVFS automatically mounts and unmounts memory cards 308657 14 00 Rev 00 4 1 Using Technician Interface Software Overview The NVFS file system on the router reads and writes to one or more memory cards Memory cards exist in 4 MB 8 MB and 16 MB sizes Each memory card provides system
26. multicast cache More information follows on the multicast cache The internal cache is limited in size and operates on a first in first out FIFO basis For this reason cache entries routes also have a finite lifetime dictated largely by the size depth of the internal cache The larger the size of the internal cache the longer it takes for an entry in that cache to expire With the ip command you can examine the entire contents of the cache for a specific logical interface configured on the router To view the cache for any interface configured on the router enter the ip command using the following syntax ip cache lt interface_address gt lt interface_address gt is the IP address of the logical interface associated with the interface cache you want to examine Multicast Cache If you enable a multicast protocol on a circuit the system allocates and maintains one multicast cache for that circuit Each entry in a multicast cache entry identifies the hosts sources and multicast groups from which the local circuit is receiving multicast traffic With the ip command you can examine the entire contents of the multicast cache for a specific physical circuit To view the multicast cache for any circuit configured on the router enter the ip command using the following syntax ip cache M lt interface_address gt lt interface_address gt is the IP address of the logical interface associated with the multicast cache you wa
27. or exclude from the events log The severity codes are e for F for fault e ior for informational e torT for trace e wor W for warning e dorD for debug Debug events are for use and interpretation by Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center personnel only You can specify in the same log command one or more severity codes For example to specify a filter that writes only Warning and Info messages to the events log enter log i fwi lt slot_numbers gt Specifies the number of the slots on which the router will write event messages to the local log buffer 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Event Logs Examples log i fdft Includes only debug fault and trace events log i fdi s2 Includes only debug and info events on slot 2 log i ff eGAME Includes only fault events for the router operating system entity log i fd s2 eOSPF Includes only debug events for OSPF running on slot 2 log i fdfitw Includes all events all severity levels are specified log x fd Excludes only debug events log x fdfitw elP Excludes all except IP events Displaying Active Write Filters You can display a list of all write filters currently in effect across the router Example log z Displays write filters currently in effect across all slots log z s lt s ot gt Displays write filters currently in effect for the slot you specify Applying Read Display Filters to the Events Log Enter the followi
28. r8 s62 ping 192 32 1 151 v Pings the device at the IP address 192 32 1 151 eight successive times sends 62 bytes of data with each ping and waits up to 3 seconds for a response to each ping The console displays one of the following for each ping sent ping 192 32 1 151 is alive size 62 bytes ping 193 32 1 151 does not respond ping ICMP host unreachable from 192 32 243 1 ping 192 32 1 151 is unreachable Provides statistical information about the ping of IP address 192 32 1 151 For example the console displays the following messages 192 32 1 151 icmp_seq 0 time 1 ms IP ping 192 32 1 151 is alive size 16 bytes PING Statistics IP ping 192 32 1 151 responded to 1 out of 1 100 success round trip ms min avg max 1 1 1 3 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands IPv6 Ping When you issue the ping command for IP version 6 IPv6 the ping program sends an Internet Control Message Protocol version 6 ICMPv6 echo request to the remote IPv6 address you specify The remote device responds if it can be reached and the console displays the response or the result of the request Enter the following to ping a remote device running IPv6 ping ipv6 lt Pv6_address gt t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt p a lt address gt i lt ifindex gt v lt Pv6_address gt is the required IPv6 address in IPv6 notation of the remote device
29. the system sorts the events from all processor modules in chronological order You can also clear events from all slots or from a single slot The event logs are checksum protected during a warm start Issuing the boot or reset command or pressing the Reset button warm starts the router However events are lost during a cold start Cycling power on the router or issuing the diags command cold starts the router When you remove and reinsert a processor module the events clear from that module only Logging and Displaying Event Messages Use the log command to specify the types of events that you want the router to include in the events log exclude from the events log or display from the events log as follows e To display the unfiltered contents of the events log enter the log command without any command arguments e To select the types of messages you want the router to include in or exclude from the events log add write filter arguments to the log command You can select or specify event types by Entity code Message severity levels Router slot numbers e To display all write filters currently in effect enter the log command with the zZ subcommand option 5 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Event Logs e To enable the router to read only certain messages from the events log to the console display add read filter arguments to the log command You can select or specify event types by Entity code S
30. wfSyslogEntFltrSevMask wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd wfSyslogEntFltrFaultMap wfSyslogEntFltrWarningMap wfSyslogEntFltrInfoMap wfSyslogEntFltrTraceMap wfSyslogEntFltrDebugMap For each attribute or parameter this appendix provides information about default settings valid options function instructions for setting and the management information base MIB object ID 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 27 Using Technician Interface Software Global Group Parameters This section describes the Syslog group global parameters Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Syslog Delete wfSyslogDelete 1 1 Create 1 Create 2 Delete Creates or deletes the Syslog service on the router Set to 1 Create to create a MIB record with system defaults for the Syslog service on the router Set to 2 Delete to delete the Syslog service from the router configuration set wfSyslog wfSyslogDelete 0 lt 1 2 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 1 1 Enable wfSyslogDisable 2 1 Enable 1 Enable 2 Disable Enables or disables Syslog services on the router Enable Syslog services by also defining at least one remote host entry in the Syslog table of hosts and at least one entity filter for the remote host you de
31. 02 yesterday All events logged by the TFTP service All events logged by the GAME and TI services All fault and warning events All events logged in slot 3 All fault and warning events logged by the TFTP service in slot 3 All fault and warning events logged by the TELNET and TCP services All events logged in the past 10 seconds All events associated with event code 8 All events in wide format You can save the events in the current event buffer to a file for later retrieval Caution The system automatically overwrites any file on the volume that has the same file name To avoid overwriting an existing file display a list of the volume s contents with the dir lt vo gt command and determine the file names already in use Enter the following save log lt vol gt lt log_file gt lt vol gt is the volume on which to store the file lt log_file gt is the name of the file you are creating to store the events We recommend that you use the log file extension when creating log files You can verify that the log file is saved by entering the dir lt vol gt command 308657 14 00 Rev 00 5 7 Using Technician Interface Software When displaying a previously saved log file you can use the same optional arguments as you can to display a current log file See the next section Saving the Events Log Automatically for instructions Another option is to limit the event types you save to
32. 1999 gt history Displays the history list 1 dinfo 2 Gar 2 3 stamp gt history 2 Repeats the second command currently in the history list dir 2 Volume in drive 2 is Directory of 2 File Name Size Date Day Time bn exe 3271441 09 13 99 Mon 16 35 07 debug al 12568 09 13 99 Mon 16 38 57 install bat 152524 09 13 99 Mon 16 39 00 ti cfg 128 09 13 99 Mon 16 39 08 config 2044 09 19 99 Sun 13257235 syslog cfg 2628 09 19 99 Sun 15 58 09 Loading a Command into Memory Use the exec command to load or unload dynamically loadable Technician Interface commands to and from memory Currently you can load only the telnet command into memory The exec telnet command is useful when booting a Nortel Networks router over a network using BootP Using exec telnet locks the telnet command into memory in case the connection to the BootP server fails 3 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands Enter the following to load a command into memory or unload a command from memory exec load unload lt command_name gt After you load a command into memory it remains there until you issue an exec unload command or until you restart the Technician Interface Using the Ping Command Use the ping command to test the reachability of a remote device running the IP IPX OSI VINES AppleTalk or Advanced Peer to Peer Networking APPN protocol The implementation of ping is different for each protocol
33. 2 shows how the values date time and UTC offset for this example map into the value of the 11 octet attribute wfRuiBootDateAndTime 7 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Octet1 Octet2 Octet3 Octet4 Octet5 Octet6 Octet7 Octet8 Octet9 Octet10 Octet 11 26 13 30 15 45 09 22 19 98 05 00 lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt lt deci seconds gt lt direction_offset_from_UTC gt lt hours_offset_from_UTC gt lt minutes_offset_from_UTC gt TS0021A Figure 7 2 RUIBOOT Date and Time Example 3 Specify a boot image name Specify a router software image name for that entry as follows BN 3 set wfRuiBootTable wfRuiBootimageName lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt bn exe BN 3 commit The name you specify belongs to the RUIBOOT table entry that has the same instance ID 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 17 Using Technician Interface Software Specify a configuration file name as follows BN 3 set wfRuiBootTable wfRuiBootConfigName lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt config2 BN 3 commit The name you specify belongs to the RUIBOOT table entry that has the same instance ID Add additional scheduled boot events To add more scheduled boot events to the router configuration repeat steps 2 through 4 otherwise go to step 6 Save the current configuration file on the router as follows BN 3 save config
34. 3 17 O online Help 3 2 operational state of a Syslog filter C 37 of a Syslog host C 35 of the Syslog entity C 29 OSI link state database displaying 7 76 osi Isp command 7 76 OSI MIB attributes wfOsiFletchRelaxedEnable 7 76 OSI ping command 3 17 to 3 19 OSPF LSDB command 7 57 out of band file transfers from a UNIX workstation B 10 to B 16 from a Windows workstation B 17 to B 31 hardware configuration B 9 overview of B 1 to B 2 P packet transfer halting between slots 7 28 parameters Console Baud Rate 2 8 Command Timeout 2 13 Data Bits 2 9 Force User Logout 2 17 Lines Per Screen 2 11 Login Retries 2 14 Login Script Search Path 2 14 Login Timeout 2 12 Manager s Login Script 2 15 Index 6 Modem Enable 2 10 More Enable 2 11 Password Timeout 2 13 Port Delete 2 5 Port Disable 2 5 Port Name 2 7 Port Number 2 6 Port Parity 2 9 Port Slot 2 7 Port State 2 6 Port Type 2 8 Stop Bits 2 10 User s Login Script 2 16 Syslog Debug Map C 45 Entity Filter Delete C 36 Entity Filter Enable C 36 Fault Map C 43 Filter Operational State C 37 Host Delete C 31 Host Log Facility C 33 Host Operational State C 35 Host Time Seq Enable C 34 Host UDP Port C 33 Info Map C 44 Log Evt Lower Bound C 38 Log Evt Upper Bound C 39 Maximum Hosts C 30 Messaging Enable C 32 Operational State C 29 Severity Mask C 40 Slot Lower Bound C 41 Slot Upper Bound C 42 Syslog Delete C 28 S
35. 4 ERR 5 WARNING 6 NOTICE 7 INFO 8 DEBUG Maps router event messages with a severity level of trace to a UNIX system error level that Syslogd recognizes Table C 1 describes each of these error levels We recommend accepting the default UNIX error level for this severity level To map this severity level to a different UNIX error level set wfSyslogEntFltrTraceMap to the error level you want set wfSyslogEntFitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrTraceMap lt host_ P_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1l2l3l4l5lel7l8 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 4 1 15 Debug Map wfSyslogEntFltrDebugMap 16 8 DEBUG 1 EMERG 2 ALERT 3 CRIT 4 ERR 5 WARNING 6 NOTICE 7 INFO 8 DEBUG Maps router event messages with a severity level of debug to an error level that UNIX Syslogd recognizes Table C 1 describes each of these error levels We recommend accepting the default UNIX system error level for this severity level To map this severity level to a different UNIX system error level set wfSyslogEntFltrDebugMap to the error level you want set wfSyslogEntFlitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrDebugMap lt host_ P_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1l2l3l4l5lel7l8 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 4 1 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 45 Using Technician Interface Software For More Information See the instructions provided in the UNIX manual man pages on your workstation for more info
36. AN processor board has one serial port labeled Console allowing you to establish one session e The ARN base module has up to three serial ports one labeled Console one labeled Modem and an optional V 34 modem interface allowing you to establish one session e The ASN base board has one serial port per router with up to four routers stacked allowing you to establish up to four sessions with the interconnected stack See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager if you prefer to use Site Manager to configure the serial port parameters for the router console Configuring Console Port Parameters The following sections describe how to use the following Technician Interface commands e list set commit save Using the list Command You can list and review all serial port attributes by entering the following command line at the Technician Interface prompt list wfSerialPortEntry 2 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring the Console Port Using the set Command Enter one of the following Technician Interface commands to configure a console port parameter set wfSerialPort Entry lt attribute_name gt lt port_no gt lt option gt set wfSerialPort Entry lt attribute_no gt lt port_no gt lt option gt set Refers to the Technician Interface set command You must have Manager access to issue a set command wfSerialPortEntry Refers to the MIB attribute name associated with a
37. Fri 15 42 01 bn exe 2635353 01 05 95 Thurs 09 08 55 4194304 bytes Total size 1356883 bytes Available free space 1356883 bytes Contiguous free space TSOO12A Figure 4 2 Sample NVFS Directory Listing Examples dir Displays the list of files on the active volume dir cfg Displays the list of files with a cfg extension on the active volume dir 3 Displays the list of files on volume 3 dir 4 log Displays the list of files with a three character file name and a og extension on volume 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System The factory default file names are as follows an exe arn exe asn exe bn exe s5000 exe anboot exe arnboot exe asnboot exe andiag exe arndiag exe asndiag exe s5000boot exe s5000diag exe config debug al The router software image for the AN and ANH The router software image for the ARN The router software image for the ASN The router software image for the BLN BLN 2 and BCN The router software image for all System 5000 routers You cannot read or change this file The system automatically refers to this binary file for booting instructions unless you use the boot command to specify a different router software image A copy of the bootstrap image resident on the bootstrap PROM of an AN series router You cannot read or change this file A copy of the bootstrap image resident on the bootstrap PROM of an ARN router You cannot read or change t
38. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks NA Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks NA Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portio
39. Reserved for future expansion with a default value of 0 chan 0 99 Indexes multiple lines over one connector such as on the MCT1 board This is equivalent to channel for MIB objects using slot conn chan format For boards that support only 1 line per connector chan 0 type 0 99 The interface type identifier for example CSMACD and SYNC These are the same as the constants defined in the CCT_NAME portion of the MIB For example CIRCUIT_TYPE_CSMACD 1 10 CIRCUIT_TYPE_SYNC 2 20 CIRCUIT_TYPE_T1 3 30 CIRCUIT_TYPE_E1 4 40 CIRCUIT_TYPE_TOKEN 5 50 CIRCUIT_TYPE_FDDI 6 60 CIRCUIT_TYPE_HSSI 7 70 slot 1 99 For most Nortel Networks routers each numbered slot holds a CPU module and a link module For model ASN routers this number represents the chassis unit identifier which contains a CPU and drives up to four link modules You set the ASN slot number by means of a thumbwheel on the chassis The thumbwheel has settings that range from 1 to 4 mod 1 9 The module number has a default value of 1 on most Nortel Networks routers which corresponds to the first only module on a slot The mod can be any number from 1 to 9 for a model ASN router where one CPU supports up to four link modules conn 1 16 Connector number for a given media It is given two digits to accommodate 16 port boards 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Example Line number 102101 chan
40. Rev 00 7 65 Using Technician Interface Software Specifying AS Path Search Patterns To retrieve only AS paths that contain a specific pattern of data enter the following command ip bgp_routes R lt simplified_regular_expression gt R Indicates that a lt simplfied_regular_expression gt follows The software filters the output of the ip bgp_routes command according to the contents of the lt simplfied_regular_expression gt lt simplified_regular_expression gt Specifies a regular expresson in terms of efficient symbolic syntax More information follows The software transparently expands a lt simplified_regular_expression gt into a fully detailed regular expression The software then compares the pattern specified by the regular expression to the data patterns in all AS paths currently known to the router The software retrieves a list of AS paths that contain the pattern you specify in the lt simplified_regular_expression gt Table 7 8 describes lt simplified_regular_expression gt syntax which applies only to Release 11 0 or later versions of the router software For detailed information about the terms segment set and sequence see Internet RFC 1654 A Border Gateway Protocol 4 BGP 4 Table 7 8 Simplified AS Pattern Matching Syntax Symbol or Operator Meaning lt Beginning of an AS SEQUENCE segment gt End of an AS SEQUENCE segment Beginning of an AS SET segment End
41. Successful Modem Initialization 2 0 2 2 cccceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees B 21 Figure B 7 Accessing Wfterm Telephone Call Functions 0 cccccesseeeseeeeeeees B 22 Figure B 8 Wfterm Dial Command Window ccccceeeeeeeereeeeees oria EA B 23 Figure B 9 Wfterm File Transfer Operation Selection Window 0 0 eects B 25 Figure B 10 Wfterm File to Transfer WiNdOW ccscceeceeeseeeeseeeeeceeeeceaeeecaeeeeetaaes B 27 Figure B 11 Wfterm Connection Closed Window ssssessssessressesinerensrnrnnsenernnernnnnens B 30 Figure B 12 Exiting Quitting the Wfterm Program sssssesseesseessseesssessressrsssrrssrnsens B 31 Figure C 1 Syslog and Syslogd Operations ceeeeeeeeees isan TA E C 3 Figure C 2 Router Event Message Filtering for One Host cccceeeceeeeteeeeeeeeeees C 5 Figure C 3 Syslog Message Encapsulation c ccccccceceeseeeeseeseeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeenaees C 8 Figure C 4 Syslog Message Composition cccccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees C 9 308657 14 00 Rev 00 XV Tables Table 4 1 TS Fe GANS asec resets crass poten A 4 3 Table 4 2 Router Software Mages airinn aain aa 4 4 Table 5 1 Log Command OPPGIS carrii oraa 5 4 Table 7 1 Options for the beonfig Command sencnunanionisiienaa a 7 4 Table 7 2 Options for the ifconfig Command aboka pion T 7 6 Table 7 3 Settings for the ifconfig Command Ethernet Interface ceeeeee 7 7 Table 7 4 Ro
42. Technician Interface console When the Technician Interface receives the echo request it sends the accompanying string or strings back to the console This command is used primarily to accompany system responses to alias commands with meaningful text This section describes how to issue an echo command and how to insert the echo command in an alias Enter the following command with one or more of the following parameters to submit an echo request echo lt string gt lt string gt is any string of characters echo lt string gt l lt string gt Double quotes are required only when the string contains one or more spaces or semicolons If you enter The console displays echo hi hi echo IP Input Statistics IP Input Statistics echo Hi hello How are you Hi hello How are you To instruct the system to display a string of characters when responding to an alias command you insert an echo command within the lt alias_value gt Surround each lt string gt within the echo command with double quotes if the lt string gt contains one or more spaces or semicolons Precede each of the double quotes surrounding the lt string gt with a backslash If you do not use double quotes insert a backslash before the semicolon that separates the echo command from the next command Insert echo to instruct the system to display blank lines between commands within an lt alias_value gt Yo
43. Trident cfg on volume 2 Configuring Scheduled Boot Services You can configure the router to boot at a date and time that you specify With Technician Interface commands you e Add scheduled boot services to a router e Plan one or more nonrepeatable scheduled boot events on a router e Name the router software image file and the router configuration file you want the router to use for a specific scheduled boot event e Manage disable reenable or delete scheduled boot services or specific scheduled boot events configured on a router The router RUIBOOT software supports all scheduled boot services Some Technician Interface commands you use to configure scheduled boot services contain the RUIBOOT software entity name 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Adding Scheduled Boot Services to a Router To add a scheduled boot service 1 Add the RUIBOOT base record to the router configuration a Log in to the router Technician Interface of the router you want to configure with a scheduled boot event For instructions on logging in through a local console or remote Telnet session see Chapter 1 a Define a slot mask for scheduled boot services on the router You must define a slot mask for the RUIBOOT entity before creating the scheduled boot service on the router The slot mask identifies the slots on which the system loads and runs RUIBOOT Enter the following at the Technician Interface prompt BN 3 se
44. UNIX Workstation ssissiisscsminsssminimin nnna avec C 12 G niiguring Syslog on Mhe ROUGE sarsii aAA C 14 Task 1 Logging In to the Router s Technician Interface 04 DURO o C 14 Task 2 Defining a Slot Mask for Syslog on the Router c ccssceeeseeeeetteeeeeees C 15 Task 3 Creating Syslog on the Rouler sssnnesnui ianuis C 15 Task 4 Configuring Syslog Global Attributes ETE EET iebsa aT T C 15 Task 5 Adding a Remote Host to the Syslog Host Ths T E AAT E S Task 6 Adding an Entity Filter for a Remote Host eccccesceecsseeeeeseeeeseeeeseees C 17 Task 7 Adding More Hosts or Entity Filters seccccicsseccccccsservectssnevcconsseercccacereccecaw C 20 Task 8 Saving Your Syslog Configuration on the Router cccsssceeesssteeeeeees C 20 Task 9 Logging Out of the Technician Interface au pain Aue C 21 Managing Syslog oma Rouler sesccccsccis saavveccetscsabaeduaveebuetrcadedangeensde hte aa aiaa C 21 Disabling or Reenabling Syslog on the Router cescceeccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeetsaes C 21 Disabling or Reenabling Syslog Hosts or Filters comme ines P C 22 Deleting Remote Hosts or Entity Filters from the Syslog Configuration C 23 Deleting Syslog from the Roulet siss ccteacaseraaasvindennliins soranseneeninsondsaunendebanraaee C 24 Example Syslog Me ut e EPs ti e 1 sicas a E trenere treater terre C 24 Syslog Parameter DescriplionS scsicetiisssesss norsdetass
45. a warm boot or a cold boot operation Table 7 5 describes the various responses the router can have to different diags commands Table 7 5 Router Diagnostic Commands and Respones You issued a diag command from a Technician Interface session console or Telnet on one slot and the target lt s ot_no gt you specified was None The same slot on which the session is running A slot other than the slot on which the session is running Command gt diag diag lt s ot_no gt diag lt s ot_no gt e Lose log info on all slots designated slot Initialize new image on designated slot Lose log info on designated slot Router AN Cold boot slot 1 Cold boot slot 1 N A ANH e Run diagnostics on slot 1 Run diagnostics on slot 1 single slot Load new image on slot1 Load new image on slot 1 e Initialize new image on Initialize new image on slot 1 slot 1 Lose log info Lose log info BLN Cold boot all slots Cold boot the designated slot Cold boot the designated BLN 2 e Run diagnostics Run diagnostics on slot BCN Load new image designated slot e Rundiagnostics on the multislot e Initialize new image Load new image on designated slot e Load new image on the designated slot e Initialize new image on the designated slot e Lose log info on the designated slot When you issue the Technician Interface diags command to test and reboot a specific module
46. a board When a processor module boots it requests a copy of the router software image currently in use The first processor module to respond to the request forwards a copy of the router software image from its memory If none is in use the processor module uses the router software image stored on its own volume if one is available The processor module then boots After it boots the processor module requests a copy of the configuration currently in use The first processor module to respond to the request forwards a copy of the configuration from its memory If none is in use the processor module uses the default configuration file config stored on its own volume if one is available The processor module then loads the configuration and initiates software services Use the boot command to boot the entire system Caution If you do not specify the router software image and configuration file when entering the boot command the system boots from the default image for example bn exe and configuration file config We recommend that you have only one version of the config file on the router You can comply with this recommendation by assigning new names to alternative versions of the configuration file The processor modules can simultaneously load different configurations if you have alternative versions of the config file and you enter the boot command without specifying the volume and configuration file with which to boot
47. a log file When you display the log file after saving it only those event types you saved are displayed Enter the following command to limit the event types you save to a log file save log lt vol gt lt log_file gt d lt date gt t lt time gt e lt entity gt f lt severity gt s lt slot_ID gt See the previous section for a description of the optional arguments Note The save log command does not clear events from memory See Clearing Events on page 5 13 Examples save log 2 10_12 log Saves all events to a file named 10_12 og in slot 2 save log 2 10_12 log d10 Saves events logged since October 12 1998 to a file 12 98 named 10_12 og in slot 2 save log 2 temp log Saves events logged since 9 02 today to a file named t09 02 00 temp log in slot 2 If it is earlier than 9 02 the system saves all events logged since 9 02 yesterday save log 3 tftp log eTFTP Saves events logged by the TFTP driver to a file named tftp log in slot 3 save log 3 snmp log Saves trace and fault events logged by the SNMP eSNMP ftf driver to a file named snmp log and stores the file in slot 3 save log 2 slot3 log s3 Saves events logged in slot 3 to a file named s ot3 log and stores the file in slot 2 5 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Event Logs Saving the Events Log Automatically Note Use this feature only for troubleshooting a Nortel Networks router We recommend that you leave this feature
48. a station mo saraunige 6 1 RN PAE VANIGS E E E E E E A A N EET 6 4 Seina MIE VANES variana a aa pee Committing MIB Sets beets icici EET ere ieee rere rasiri airna teieni 6 8 Gavina Me SOMA DOIN ssop E a Ea a 6 9 Veng me MIBI COU yt eet ceenen recente n a tnre renin strrere rere tent a 6 9 308657 14 00 Rev 00 vii Chapter 7 System Administration Managing AN ANH ARN and ASN Routers siscssccccsiessactsessseeccnsaccnenisrveenadiertocuecninse 7 2 Gonigunoo the Bont BOUNCE axishersaannssacanaedsiaaninaiin NLN A arenas eee 7 3 Configuring Initial Interfaces and Netboot Operation ccceee Pere aaant O Configuring the Initial IP Synchronous Interface c ccceeeeeeteeceeeeeeetteeeeeees 7 5 Configuring an Ethernet Interface for Network Booting c sccccceesseeeeeenees 7 7 Enabling and Disabling Interfaces with ifconfig ec ceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaaes 7 8 Bonini ie OURS sesiunii E ea NE 7 9 How the Router Boots PT T A ere are er T T TENES BOGU rinisin aN 7 10 Configuring Scheduled Boot Services ssesssseesseseesssnesitrsssrsssrrsesnnesnnnrnnennnnnnnnnnne 7 12 Adding Scheduled Boot Services to a Router PEE T ni on 7 13 Scheduling Boot EVES sssini uae ia a A Managing Scheduled Boot Servies ii ctenesccsepiiasasceaadsesrsseaasdcedpinisentsmrnurbdeaneutns 7 18 Disabling or Reenabling Scheduled Boot Services on a Router s 7 19 Disabling or Re
49. alias alias alias alias alias EEEH FE AE FE AE AE FE AE AE AE AE FE FE AE AE AE FE FE AEE FE H FE Autoscript for Manager Copyright 1999 Nortel Networks Inc HEHEHE FE AE AE EE FE AE AE AE EE AE AE AE FE EH HHH nitialize aliases for script sho run show bat S show run show bat setpath run setpath bat disable run disable bat enable run enable bat monitor run monitor bat menu run menu bat User login autoscript FE FE AE AE AE FE AE AE AE AE FE FE AE AE AE FE FE AEE FE H E Autoscript for User Copyright 1999 Nortel Network FE AE AE AE AE FE AE AE AE AE FE FE AE AE AE FE FE AEE HH Initialize aliases for script alias alias alias alias alias alias alias sho run show bat S show run show bat setpath run setpath bat disable run disable bat enable run enable bat monitor run monitor bat menu run menu bat FE AE AE AE AE FE FE AE AE AE FE aE AE AE AE FE FE AE AE AE E FE TE EAE FE FE AE AE AE AE FE FE AE AE AE FE FE FE AE AE E FE FE AE AE AE FE FE FE EH HE based commands y Net EH EH FE FE AE AE FE EEE EE AE AE AE EE EH FE s Inc HEE EH aE EH EE EE EEE HE based commands go y5 s 2 20 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring the Console Port Customizing Autoscript Files You can customize the automgr bat or autouser bat scripts by entering the appropriate commands or aliases into the script Se
50. applies the value of the Severity Mask attribute to the current filter Enter the severity level identifiers of event messages you want to forward to the remote host associated with this filter Use the first letter of each event severity level you want to include f fault w warning i information t trace d debug Enter lowercase letters only Do not separate the letters with commas or spaces set wiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSevMask lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt witfd gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 9 C 40 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Parameter Slot Lower Bound Attribute Name wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd Attribute Number 10 Default 0 Range Otol4 Function Along with the Slot Upper Bound this parameter specifies a slot number or range of slot numbers Syslog forwards to the remote host associated with this filter messages logged only on the slots you specified Consider the location of each router in an ASN chassis as a numbered slot Instructions To specify a range of slots set the value of this parameter to the low number of the range Also set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd Slot Upper Bound to the higher number of the range Any range you specify includes the values for the lower and upper bound parameters For example if you specify a lower bound of 1 and an upper bound of 4 Syslog forwards all e
51. client Set according to your console requirements set wfSerialPortEntry 13 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 13 More Enable wfSerialPortMoreEnable 14 1 Enable 1 Enable 2 Disable Specifies whether the Technician Interface pauses after each screen fills with data Select 1 Enable to configure the Technician Interface to pause after each screen fills with data Select 2 Disable to configure the Technician Interface not to pause after each screen fills with data set wfSerialPortEntry 14 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 14 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Prompt wfSerialPortPrompt 15 Any string of up to 19 keyboard characters except for control key sequences Specifies the character string used as the Login prompt on the Technician Interface console screen Accept the default or specify a different character string If you include spaces enclose this string in quotes set wfSerialPortEntry 15 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 15 Note To help identify the slot where the Technician Interface that is your console or Telnet session is running you can configure the console and Telnet prompts on Nortel Networks routers in your network to lt router_name gt slot
52. code for example ip 2 snmp 3 csmacd 9 and the fourth byte indicates the event number or the particular event type unique to each entity The specific traps contain one variable binding a display string with the name 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 5 4 1 0 The string contains the actual log message that was recorded in the system event log The SNMP set operation is not supported for MIB II objects All set operations must be performed through the Nortel Networks private MIB 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 Line Number Attributes Line number attributes exist in all line records for example SYNC HSSI CSMACD and TOKEN in the Nortel Networks router MIB for Version 9 00 router software These attributes have the name wfXyzLineNumber where Xyz is the prefix for the appropriate line record Site Manager generates a line number attribute to uniquely identify each port in the router configuration The router uses line numbers to accommodate more than one line per port and to reference WAN protocols configured on those lines A 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using the Nortel Networks Router MIB The line number encodes several attributes of the line it represents You can use Technician Interface list and get commands to examine and decode a line number The individual fields of the number correspond to different attributes of a line as follows 0 00 00 00 0 00 resv chan type slot mod conn Field Purpose resv 0 1
53. command 7 57 bn exe image 4 4 4 9 boot command 7 9 to 7 12 delayed 7 12 router 7 9 to boot file source configuring 7 2 to 7 4 Index 1 BOOTP server 7 6 7 7 broadcast addresses 3 8 3 11 C cache DVMRP 7 72 interface 7 69 internal 7 71 MTM forwarding 7 73 multicast 7 70 cd command 4 11 clearlog command 5 13 CLNP echo request 3 17 clocking 7 6 commands access levels 7 84 to 7 87 alias management alias 8 2 echo 8 5 save aliases 8 8 source aliases 8 9 unalias 8 7 verbose 8 7 atmarp 3 29 bconfig 7 3 to 7 4 BGP routes 7 57 DVMRP caches 7 57 halting 3 3 history 3 4 ifconfig 7 5 to 7 7 IP cache 7 57 IP routes 7 57 IPv6 routes 7 77 7 78 mtm 7 57 NVFS cd 4 11 compact 4 18 copy 4 11 delete 4 16 dinfo 4 6 dir 4 7 format 4 18 partition 4 19 tftp 4 13 type 4 16 operating bconfig 7 3 boot 7 9 clearlog 5 13 date 7 39 diags 7 24 exec 3 7 help 3 2 history 3 4 ifconfig 7 5 loadmap 7 38 log 5 5 5 12 logout 1 12 more 3 2 password 7 42 ping AppleTalk 3 23 to 3 25 ping APPN 3 26 to 3 28 ping IP 3 7 to 3 10 ping IPv6 3 11 to 3 13 ping IPX 3 14 to 3 16 ping OSI 3 17 to 3 19 ping VINES 3 20 to 3 22 prom 7 28 7 32 readexe 7 28 to 7 29 IPv6 statistics 7 77 record 7 53 IPv6 stats 7 82 repeat 3 3 issuing 3 1 reset 7 21 MIB restart 7 20 commit 2 4 6 8 save log 5 7 get 6 4 stamp 7 27 list 6 1 sy
54. connect to the Technician Interface port of a remote router choose Dial Phone from the Wfterm phone menu The Dial Command window opens Figure B 8 B 22 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program File Modem Phone File Transfers Help Dial Command Phone Number to Dial RIAA Figure B 8 Wfterm Dial Command Window Enter in the Dial Command window the telephone number of a router that has a configuration file you want to retrieve Clicking on OK initiates the dialing sequence Note You can enter and store one telephone number in the Dial Command window Each time you need to call a different router enter the telephone number of that router in the Dial Command window It may be helpful for you to maintain a list of the telephone numbers for every router you need to access by means of out of band dial in connection The Wfterm utility always retains the last number you enter Closing and reopening Wfterm does not clear the number last stored If the call in progress is successful Wfterm opens a connection between your Site Manager workstation and the Technician Interface port of the called router The Technician Interface login prompt appears in the Wfterm startup window but you may have to press return to invoke the Technician Interface prompt If the call in progress is unsuccessful Wfterm displays an appropriate message
55. disabled default at all other times You can configure any model of Nortel Networks router to save the entire events log automatically The system saves the file just prior to overwriting the oldest messages in the log This feature helps to prevent the loss of event message information accumulated in the log over time With the log autosave feature enabled the system Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Name Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Saves the log the number of times you designate in MIB attribute wfSerialPortEntry wfSerialPortAutoSaveNumFiles or until the memory card or diskette drive becomes full Saves the log to the memory card or diskette file system volume you designate in MIB attribute wfSerialPortEntry wfSerialPortAutoSave Volume Saves the log to the file name auto lt x gt log where lt x gt is a value from 1 to the maximum value you set for MIB attribute wfSerialPortEntry wfSerialPortAutoSaveNumFiles Maximum Autosaved Files wfSerialPortAutoSaveNumFiles 33 0 log autosave off 0 to 99 Specifies the number of times the system automatically saves the events log to a file system volume The system saves the log the maximum number of times you specify or until the memory card or diskette drive on the router becomes full Accept the default value 0 disabled or specify the number of times you want to save the log to a new file set wfSerialPortEntry 33 lt i
56. enter a cd command to change from the current directory to the directory that should receive the files you want to transfer from the router 2 Enter a tip command on the workstation to open a dial connection between the workstation and the desired router For example tip modem0 modem0 designates the workstation port that accommodates the dial modem attached to the workstation The system displays the following message Connected B 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files Press Return to invoke the Technician Interface login prompt from the target router The system displays the following prompt Login Enter Manager and a password if necessary to log in to the router s Technician Interface The system displays the following message and prompt to th Welcom lt nod type gt Technician Interface Enter a cd command to designate the disk volume or memory card volume that contains the files you want to transfer to your UNIX workstation For example cd a designates diskette volume a or cd 2 designates a memory card volume in router slot 2 Enter a dir command if necessary to view the list of files in the volume or memory card The system displays a screen similar to the following File Name Size Date Day Time abc cfg 1814 10 28 94 Thurs 10 29 06 def cfg 2293 11 03 94 Wed LT LOZ 9 ghi cfg 4197 11 15 94 Mon 08 34 04 7 Determine which files you need to tr
57. equal to any you specified in the message severity mask You define severity levels by setting a value for the wfSyslogEntFltrSevMask filter attribute in the router s active MIB For example if an entity filter for FTP has a Message Severity Mask of wfi the filter passes only FTP event messages that have a severity level of warning w fault f or information i Filtering by Slot Number The router stores event messages in the log buffer associated with each slot You can configure an entity filter to select for forwarding only event messages logged on the slots you specify You must specify at least one slot in the range 1 to 14 where the slot numbers depend on the router model You define a range of slot numbers for an entity filter by specifying e An upper boundary number MIB object wfSyslogFltrSlotUppBnd e A lower boundary number MIB object wfSyslogFltrSlotLowBnd Syslog considers the upper and lower boundary numbers as part of the range For example you can configure an entity filter for FTP with an event number range of 5 to 27 and a slot number range of 2 to 5 In this case Syslog forwards to the associated remote host FTP log messages numbered 5 to 27 logged on slots 2 to 5 only 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 7 Using Technician Interface Software You can configure a filter to select messages logged on a specific slot by setting the upper and lower slot boundary values to the same number Note With both t
58. first shipped to Licensee Nortel Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Nortel Networks during the warranty period along with proof of the date of shipment This warranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Nortel Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected Nortel Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been i altered except by Nortel Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PART
59. from the router change the setting for wfSyslogDelete a global parameter attribute as follows set wiSyslog wfSyslogDelete 0 2 commit Example Syslog Configuration The following is an example of a Syslog configuration procedure when Your management workstation has an IP address of 192 32 6 14 You want to receive at your management workstation messages for all software entities running on a particular Nortel Networks router This is a wildcard configuration scenario You want to create and enable Syslog on a model BLN router You want to capture all fault warning and debug level messages from the router You want to capture only messages logged on slots 2 to 4 of the router Proceed as follows 1 Define a slot mask for Syslog on the router set wfProtocols wfSYSLLoad 0 0x7FFE0000 commit The hexadecimal number 7FFE0000 converts to the binary number 0111 1111 1111 1110 0000 0000 0000 0000 The most significant bit position of the binary number represents slot 1 The bit positions in descending order of significance represent slots 2 3 4 and so on Create the Syslog base record on the router set wfSyslog 1 0 1 commit Create a host record for 192 32 6 14 set wfSyslogHostTable wfSyslogHostEntry 1 192 32 6 14 1 commit Note When you create a host record the log facility defaults to a value of 184 Local7 C 24 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events 4
60. go to step 1 Otherwise you may want to first obtain a list of hosts already configured on the router To list existing entries in the Syslog host table enter the following command at the Technician Interface prompt list i wfSyslogHostEniry The list includes the instance IDs in this case the IP addresses of all remote hosts currently defined in the Syslog host table 1 Add a new host entry to the Syslog Host Table as follows set wfSyslogHostTable wfSyslogHostDelete lt host_ P_address gt 1 commit This entry informs Syslog of a remote host at the destination IP address that you specified If you want to accept the default settings for host attributes wfSyslogHostLogFacility 184 Local7 and wfSyslogHostTimeSeqEnable 2 disabled go to Task 6 Otherwise continue with step 2 to configure a customized setting for either attribute To define the UNIX system facility you want to receive Syslog messages from the router enter the following set wfSyslogHostTable wfSyslogHostLogFacility lt host_ P_address gt lt 128 136 144l 152 1601 168l 176 184 gt commit 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events where 128 localO 160 local4 136 locall 168 local5 144 local2 176 local6 152 local3 184 local7 3 To optionally enable Syslog message time sequencing for the remote host enter the following set wfSyslogHostTable wfSyslogHostTlmeSeqEnable lt host_I
61. i B 5 PU IES aiae E E OA B 7 x 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Far More MON AON osecctese crete see See nah A A S B 7 inpiememetion MS ioien ieun aaae AE DAAE EE TAE B 7 PiS UVM saasaa cedeaiy ned eaity cateaey made R ueaeadaenenii B 8 Eor lotto a adnia ee rrr treet renee err ty rereereye err er Tres creer reer rrr tte B 8 Canceling a File Transfer Risin iinet E E r E T B 8 Modem interace DiNerentos ciscctscsccnesccsateniepcaccanmiveanemniecsicenmicasnoneerearnenmecceennens B 8 NIN modem Log EES siss sa axrdaccessunsoucessaanduetessuaduiiessusinonscedeandsuceasnunoueeds Sibiu B 9 Hardware Configuratioi sxc siscartancidsehvceiarsaivancvigcieiaselsestaoeris riis eerie sete aani B 9 Out of Band File Transfers from a UNIX Workstation ase EEA A E E B 10 Openinga CONDROHON sorene inca tammoesuatetians B 10 Transferring Files from a Router to a UNIX Workstation seese B 10 Transferring Files from a UNIX Workstation to a Router cceeeceeeeeeeeneeetees B 13 Out of Band File Transfers from a Windows Workstation eens anus B 17 xmodem and the Nortel Networks Communications Terminal Progiam T B 17 OPED AETI an ndehantiaak tani wanelnmndvan auonsmuneent B 18 Checking and Verifying Current Modem Interface Settings meena siemens B 19 JEM ZU fhe Local Modam serere B 21 Using Witerm Telephone Call FUNCOMS oiiccsceciniccccccsssstncasee cannes anentrnentiiaarene B 22 Dialing a POLS PROUT Pens ccesscsveccaratscneremunieedenin
62. in this license for civilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 227 7013 for agencies of the Department of Defense or their successors whichever is applicable 6 Use of Software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Nortel Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Nortel Networks 7 Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respect to Nortel Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Nortel Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Nortel Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licensee will immediately destroy or return to Nortel Networks the Software user manuals and all copies Nort
63. inactive host 1 active 2 inactive Indicates the operational state of this Syslog host entry on the router If the state is active Syslog is filtering and forwarding messages to the host at the IP address for this entry lt wfSyslogHostDest gt If the state is inactive Syslog is not filtering or forwarding messages for any of the following reasons e Syslog has been disabled wfSyslogDisable 2 e This entry in the Syslog host table has been disabled e This entry has no configured filters e No filter entries for this host are active e Too many Syslog host entries are already active The number of configured hosts is greater than the value of wfSyslogMaxHosts Examine the value of wfSyslogHostOperState to determine whether or not Syslog is forwarding any messages to the host associated with this wfSyslogHostEntry lt instance_id gt get wiSyslogHosiEniry wfSyslogHostOperState lt wfSysiogHostDest gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 2 1 7 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 35 Using Technician Interface Software Entity Filter Parameters This section describes the parameters you can configure for each filter entry you add to the Syslog entity filter table Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Entity Filter D
64. it has timed out the system does not send an alive message to the console The default is 5 lt repeat_count gt is the number of ping messages to send The system does not wait for the timeout before sending the next ping Enter a value from 0 to 10 The default is 1 The console displays one of the following messages when you issue a ping osi command If you enter a value other than 0 in the lt repeat_count gt argument the system displays one of the following messages for the default ping plus one for each additional ping e An alive message This message appears if the system receives a CLNP echo response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 is alive e Adoes not respond message This message appears if the NSAP address of the target device is resolved but the system does not receive a CLNP echo response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 does not respond 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 17 Using Technician Interface Software A lt target address gt is unreachable message This message appears if the local Nortel Networks router cannot find the specified address in its routing table OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 is unreachable An NSAP address is too short message This message appears if the NSAP address is too short The minimum allowed NSAP address length is 20 he
65. lt entity_code gt identifies the software entity for which you want Syslog to forward event messages to the remote host at the lt host_ P_address gt lt filter_index gt is the next available index number you can assign to a filter for the desired entity and remote host pair After you create an entity filter for a specific host define e An event number or range and a slot number or range or e A severity mask and a slot number or range Note The filter remains inactive until you define the event and slot number s or the severity mask and slot number s 3 Set entity filter attributes as follows a To define by event number s the event messages you want Syslog to select and forward to a specific remote host set wfSyslogEntFlitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 255 gt set wfSyslogEntFlitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 255 gt commit If you do not want to define filtering by event number s accept the default values for event number lower bound 0 and upper bound 255 Then go to step 2b Accepting these default values causes Syslog to use only the severity and slot mask criteria for selecting and forwarding messages 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events b Define a severity mask only if you did not alread
66. mode on or more mode off more on more s on 24 more on lt no gt more off Halting a Command Enables the more mode pauses the system and prompts you to continue when a screen fills Enables the more mode sets screen size to 24 lines no output displayed Displays the number of lines that you specify before pausing Disables the more mode The screen scrolls automatically without prompting you Press Control c hold down the Control key and press c to halt processing of a command you just issued This escape sequence returns the Technician Interface prompt to your console or Telnet screen Repeating the Command Last Entered Use the repeat command to repeat execution of the last command you entered You can specify an optional repetition count to repeat the command 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Enter the following to execute the last command you entered where lt repeat_count gt is the optional number of times you want to execute the command The default is 1 time lt repeat_count gt Examples Executes the last command you entered 15 Executes the last command you entered five times Repeating a Command Recently Entered Use the history command to e View a list of the Technician Interface commands most recently entered during the current console or Telnet session e Recall and run a specific command from the history list The router retrieves the list from t
67. of an AS SET segment lt seq gt set AS path containing a sequence in the first segment and a set in the second segment continued 7 66 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Table 7 8 Simplified AS Pattern Matching Syntax continued Symbol or Operator Meaning NS Following pattern occurs at the beginning of the AS path Preceding pattern occurs at the end of the AS path Logical OR operation Match this or that X Exact match x X Matching AS pattern that begins with X for example _99 matches 99 991 9934 X Matching AS pattern that ends with X for example 99_ matches 99 199 23299 Note Use the symbols lt gt and only when you want to distinguish between AS sets and AS sequences Table 7 9 shows examples of AS path pattern matching using the ip bgp_routes command with a lt simplified_regular_expression gt Table 7 9 Simplified AS Pattern Matching Examples Command Operation AS path contains ip bgp_routes R _555_ gt Match exactly any occurrence of AS 555 inside any AS SEQUENCE ip bgp_routes R _555_ Match exactly any occurrence of AS 555 inside any AS SET ip bgp_routes R 555_ Match any AS that begins with 555 ip bgp_routes R 555_ Match any sequence that begins with AS 555 ip bgp_routes R _555_ Match any occurrence of AS 555 inside either an AS SEQUENCE or an AS SET ip b
68. of long or multiple commands After creating the alias you enter the alias name to invoke its associated commands This chapter describes how to do the following e Create an alias in memory and enter its name to invoke its associated commands e Display the commands associated with an alias e Debug an alias e Delete an alias e Save aliases to a file in the NVFS for later retrieval e Load aliases from a file into RAM e Use the aliases in the debug al file to debug common network problems 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 1 Using Technician Interface Software Creating and Displaying an Alias You can use the alias command either to create an alias or to display the commands associated with an existing alias Enter the following to display or create an alias alias lt name gt lt alias_value gt lt name gt is one of the following optional alias name types e The name of the alias you are creating The name may be one to 15 alphanumeric characters the initial character must be alphabetical e The name of an existing alias when you want to display its associated commands lt alias_value gt is a string of Technician Interface commands The following rules apply to inserting characters in the lt alias_value gt e Separate commands with a space and a semicolon 6699 e Use double quotes outside the lt alias_value gt if it includes a space or a semicolon The quotes are otherwise o
69. or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host ID for which it was originally acquired b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes in support of authorized use of the Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and user manuals are protected under copyright laws Nortel Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Nortel Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in whole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfer the Software or user manu
70. or the directory search is not complete A sample message follows APPN ping ping of bay did not complete in the time allowed An unreachable message This message appears if no route could be calculated to the remote device or if the remote device does not support APINGD A sample message follows APPN ping bay is unreachable An invalid name message This message appears if the specified node name or mode name is invalid A sample message follows APPN ping invalid name specified AN APPN service is not running message This message appears if the APPN service is disabled on the router A sample message follows APPN ping APPN service is not running Examples ping appn raleigh Pings the device at the APPN address raleigh and waits up to 15 seconds default for a response The console displays one of the following messages APPN ping raleigh is alive APPN ping raleigh is unreachable 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 27 Using Technician Interface Software ping appn raleigh r100 s2000 m inter ping appn raleigh r10 s2000 m batch t100 Pings the device at the APPN address raleigh 100 successive times sending 2000 bytes of data with each ping and specifying the interactive mode The console displays one of the following messages APPN ping ping of raleigh did not complete in the time allowed APPN ping raleigh is alive APPN ping raleigh is unreachable Pings the device at the APPN address raleigh 1
71. receives a response to a ping after it has timed out the system does not send an alive message to the console The default is 5 lt repeat_count gt is the number of ping messages to send The system does not wait for the timeout before sending the next ping Enter a value from 0 to 10 The default is 1 lt size gt is the number of bytes of data to send with each ping The default is 16 p generates a path trace report that displays the intervening hop addresses to the destination Note If you use the p option to display the intervening hops to the destination and the intervening hops are Nortel Networks routers the Technician Interface displays their network addresses Otherwise it displays a for each hop that is not a Nortel Networks router 3 20 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands The console displays one of the following messages when you issue a ping command If you enter a value in the lt repeat_count gt argument the system displays one of the following messages for the default ping plus one for each additional ping An alive message This message appears if the system receives a response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed The message also indicates the size of the test packet A sample message follows VINES ping 2705682 8003 is alive size 16 bytes A does not respond message This message appears if the address of the target device is resolved but the sys
72. router The instructions describe How to determine the models of router that need a PROM update How to determine whether you must upgrade the PROMs in a specific model of router by using the Technician Interface prom command or by physically replacing the existing PROM device with a new PROM device How the PROM upgrade process works How to determine the current versions of PROM images residing in a router What you need to know about upgrading PROMs in a remote router How to specify the commands necessary to upgrade and verify a PROM Caution If you do not follow these instructions you may disable the router you are trying to upgrade 7 32 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration During an update the system erases the image stored in the target PROM and writes the new image into the PROM This is sometimes called burning the PROM To verify the image update the system compares the contents of the new image file to the image file in the PROM Upgrading PROMs Remotely Because the operations involved in upgrading PROMs place an increased load on the router there is a greater chance that the PROM upgrade process will time out or fail during periods of peak traffic on your network Caution If the PROM upgrade process is interrupted the router could be disabled Follow these guidelines to ensure that the PROM upgrade is successful e Store the PROM executable files for example frediag exe or frebo
73. seconds since this route was last updated or verified to be correct The meaning of too old depends on the routing protocol specified under Proto Note that RIP and EGP routes are refreshed only on a slot that receives a route update Route ages may be different on each slot for this reason ASE Fwd Addr An address for forwarding packets to a destination external to the AS but not accessible through an AS boundary router Cost Number of hops to reach the destination Link State ID Indicates the piece of the routing domain that the LSID advertisement describes as follows If LS Type 1 LSID the originating router s router ID If LS Type 2 LSID the IP interface address of the network s designated router If LS Type 3 LSID the destination network s IP address If LS Type 4 LSID the router ID of the AS boundary router If LS Type 5 LSID the destination network s IP address Loc Pref A discretionary attribute used by a BGP speaker to inform other BGP speakers in its own autonomous system of the originating speaker s degree of preference for an advertised route 7 64 308657 14 00 Rev 00 LS Type Mask Metric Network NextHopAddr AS Org Peer Rem Addr Proto Seq Nbr SI or Slot Weight System Administration Indicates the type of OSPF link state advertisement as follows 0 stub advertisement 1 router links advertisement 2 network links advertisement 3 s
74. specified for this filter When the state is INACTIVE Syslog does not use this filter to select and forward messages to aremote host for one or more of the following reasons e The filter s host is not ACTIVE e The filter does not have a configured event number or range e The filter does not have a configured severity mask e The filter slot numbers do not correspond to actual slot numbers on this router model Retrieve the value of this attribute when you want to check the status of a filter for a specific entity get wiSyslogEntFitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrOperState 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 37 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Log Evt Lower Bound wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd 7 0 0 to 255 Along with the Log Evt Upper Bound this parameter specifies an event number code or range of event numbers The numbers correspond to event messages you want to forward to the remote host associated with this filter For a complete list of event codes for each entity see event database for BayRS routers for this version of the router software To specify a range of event numbers that identify messages you want to forward to a remote host set the value of this parameter to the low number of the range Set the value of the wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd Log Event Upper Bound pa
75. t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt p a lt address gt i lt ifindex gt v are optional These parameters are as follows lt timeout gt is the number of seconds for each ping to time out If the system receives a response to a ping after it has timed out the system does not send an alive message to the console The default is 5 lt repeat_count gt is the number of ping messages to send Enter a value from 0 to 10 The default is 1 lt size gt is the number of bytes of data to send with each ping The default is 16 p generates a path trace report that displays the intervening hop addresses to the destination and the time it took to reach them lt address gt is any local global scope IPv6 address that the ping command uses as the source IPv6 address lt ifindex gt is the interface index The interface index is a number that identifies the IPv6 interface sending the ICMPv6 echo request packets You must provide the lt ifindex gt when the specified IPv6 address is a link local scope fe80 address v verbose generates statistical information about the ICMP echo request including information about the success rate and round trip time Note The Nortel Networks implementation of the ICMP protocol does not support loopback pinging your own system or broadcast addresses 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 11 Using Technician Interface Software The console displays one of the following mes
76. that is the image file used as a source for upgrading the PROM matches the image actually stored in the boot or diagnostics PROM on a designated slot When you use the v option the console displays one of the following messages after the verification routine terminates prom slot lt slot_ID gt completed successfully prom PROM data does not match file data on slot lt slot ID gt If the operation succeeds the new images stored in the boot and diagnostics PROMs run when you reboot the router If the operation fails the console displays a message describing the cause of the failure Additional Examples prom v 2 frediag exe 3 prom w 2 freboot exe 3 Any one of the following prom w 2 frediag exe 2 3 4 5 prom w 2 frediag exe 2345 prom w 2 frediag exe 2 3 5 prom w 2 frediag exe 2 5 Verifies the contents of the diagnostics PROM on slot 3 against the contents of the frediag exe file on volume 2 Erases the bootstrap PROM on slot 3 and copies the contents of the freboot exe file on volume 2 to the PROM on slot 3 Erases the diagnostics PROMs on slots 2 3 4 and 5 and copies the contents of the frediag exe file on volume 2 to the PROMs on slots 2 3 4 and 5 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 37 Using Technician Interface Software Viewing the Load Addresses and Sizes of Applications The loadmap command allows you to view the load address and size of each dynamically loadable application Enter the load
77. the above but displays the intervening hop addresses to the destination before displaying the response message for each ping For example the console displays the following messages VINES ping 809637039 1 VINES ping 809847041 1 VINES ping 2705682 8003 is alive size 16 bytes Pings the device at the VINES address 2705682 8003 eight successive times and waits up to 3 seconds for a response to each ping The console displays one of the following for each ping sent VINES ping 2705682 8003 is alive VINES ping 2705682 8003 does not respond VINES ping 2705682 8003 is unreachable The console also displays the following type of message after reporting the progress of each ping VINES ping 2705682 8003 responded to 8 out of 8 100 success 3 22 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands AppleTalk Ping When you issue the ping command for AppleTalk to a remote AppleTalk device the console displays the response from the remote device if the ping reaches the device or the result of the request AppleTalk ping uses the AppleTalk Echo Protocol Enter the following to ping a remote device running AppleTalk ping at lt network_ID gt lt node_ID gt t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt lt network_ID gt lt node_ D gt is the required AppleTalk address of the remote device in the format of a 16 bit network number and an 8 bit node number Note You can enter the network and
78. the router configuration BN 3 set wfRuiBootEntry wfRuiBootDisable lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt 2 commit To reenable a scheduled boot event anytime after disabling it BN 3 set wfRuiBootEntry wfRuiBootDisable lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt 1 commit Modifying Attributes for Scheduled Boot Events You can modify e The name of the router software image file e The name of the router configuration file You cannot directly modify the date time or UTC offset attribute wfRuiBootDateAndTime for a scheduled boot event If you need to change any of these for an existing entry in the RUIBOOT table of scheduled boot events proceed as follows 1 Delete the entry from the RUIBOOT table of scheduled boot events 2 Create a replacement entry 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 19 Using Technician Interface Software Deleting Scheduled Boot Events Delete a scheduled boot event as follows BN 3 set wfRuiBootEntry wfRuiBootDelete lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt 2 commit You can save your change s to the current configuration file as follows BN 3 save config lt vol gt lt filename gt lt vol gt is the NVFS flash volume on which you want to store a copy of the current modified configuration file on the router lt filename gt is the name you assign to the current router configuration file Deleting Scheduled Boot Services from the Router To delete scheduled boot services from the router change the setting for wfRuiBoot
79. the volume in slot 3 This file is displayed in hexadecimal format Deleting a File Use the delete command to delete files that you specify You can use the wildcard characters and when issuing the delete command 3 Caution You cannot recover a file after it is deleted The delete command does not prompt you to verify a deletion Enter the following to delete a file on the active volume delete lt file name gt 4 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System Enter the following to delete a file on a different volume delete lt vol gt lt file name gt lt vol gt is the slot number of the volume containing the file lt file name gt is the name of the file You can enter del or delete when deleting a file Examples delete alt cfg delete 2 16_22 log delete 3 log delete 4 22 log Deletes the alt cfg file on the active volume Deletes the 6_22 log file on volume 2 Deletes all files with the og file name extension on volume 3 Deletes all files with a three character file name and a og file name extension on volume 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Compacting File Space When you delete a file from a memory card the file and its data become inaccessible and eventually occupy all remaining storage space on that card Use the compact command to e Copy active files to memory e Erase the card s contents e Copy the active f
80. you set the wfCSMACDAlignmentMode attribute to 3 DISABLED the router transmits the nonoptimally aligned frames without realigning them first When you set the wfCSMACDAlignmentMode attribute to 2 ALIGN_OVER_128_BYTES the router realigns the nonoptimally aligned frames exceeding 128 bytes before transmitting them and transmits the nonoptimally aligned frames of 128 bytes or less without realigning them first Monitoring IP Routes The ip command allows you to display IP data from any of the following sources e Main routing table for any slot e Internal cache for any slot e Routing cache for a specific logical interface e Multicast routes cache e BGP routes table for any BGP peer e OSPF Link State Data Base LSDB You choose the source by specifying a lt subcommand gt in the command line You can also selectively filter the data by specifying one or more option lt flags gt in the command line Enter the ip command as follows ip lt subcommand gt lt flags gt lt subcommand gt lt toutes bgp_routes cache dvmrp_caches mtm ospf_Isdb gt 7 56 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Table 7 6 explains the meanings of each ip subcommand in more detail Table 7 6 IP Subcommand Meanings Subcommand System Response routes bgp_routes The routing table you select by specifying appropriate command flags RIP and EGP routes refresh only on slots that receive route updates Route
81. you want to change e Change router FAULT message mapping as follows set wfSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrFaultMap lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 8 gt The default value of wfSyslogEntFltrFaultMap is 3 mapping router FAULT level messages to UNIX system level CRIT messages e Change router WARNING message mapping as follows set wfSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrWarningMap lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 8 gt 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 19 Using Technician Interface Software The default value of wfSyslogEntFltrWarning Map is 5 mapping router WARNING level messages to UNIX system level WARNING messages Change router INFO message mapping as follows set wfiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrinfoMap lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 8 gt The default value of wfSyslogEntFltrInfoMap is 7 mapping router INFO level messages to UNIX system level INFO messages Change router TRACE message mapping as follows set wfiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrTraceMap lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 8 gt The default value of wfSyslogEntFltrTraceMap is 3 mapping router TRACE level messages to UNIX system level CRIT messages Change router DEBUG message mapping as follows set wfiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrDebugMap lt host_IP_address gt
82. 0 successive times sending 2000 bytes of data with each ping and specifying the batch mode and a timeout of 100 seconds The console displays one of the following messages APPN ping ping of raleigh did not complete in the time allowed APPN ping raleigh is alive APPN ping raleigh is unreachable 3 28 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands Displaying the ATM ARP Table for an Interface You can display the ATM ARP tables for a specific IP interface address by entering the atmarp command during a Technician Interface session The command has the following syntax and options atmarp table lt options gt lt P_address gt Option Flag Purpose a Displays the ATM address for the lt P_address gt you enter in the command line r Displays the resolution table for the lt P_address gt you enter in the command line V Displays the virtual circuit VC table for the lt P_address gt you enter in the command line Displays all r v and a tables for the lt P_address gt you enter in the command line lt IP_address gt is the address of an IP interface on the ATM ARP client or server Examples server 2 1 atmarp table r 128 185 97 73 IP address Life ATM address Vpi vci 128 185 97 74423 39000000000000000000000000 0000a20d74aa01 0 63 2 1 atmarp table I 128 185 97 73 IP Address State Encaps Lifetime Retries 128 185 97 74 Resolved Default 410 0 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 29
83. 1 1 1 12 1 5 13 2 Specifies the number of bits that follow each ASCII character received or transmitted by the router Selecting option 2 1 5 stop bits for any AN ANH series router defaults to option 3 2 stop bits Set according to your console requirements set wfSerialPortEntry 11 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 11 Modem Enable wfSerialPortModemEnable 12 2 Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable Specifies whether the terminal connects directly or via a modem to the Technician Interface Use the 1 Enable setting to configure the terminal for connection via a modem to the Technician Interface Use the 2 Disable setting to configure the terminal for connection directly to the Technician Interface set wfSerialPortEntry 12 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 12 2 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Configuring the Console Port Lines Per Screen wfSerialPortLinesPerScreen 13 24 lines 1 to 512 lines Specifies the maximum number of lines displayed on the console screen before the system displays the More prompt The screen may override the number of lines you specify if Telnet can negotiate the window size with the remote
84. 141 251 0 0 16 RIP 20 2 2 192 32 174 33 7Tb9e0002 146 240 0 0 16 RIP 20 22 2 19232 5174 33 769e0002 170 41 0 0 16 RIP 20 x2 2 T92 2n 174 33 7Tb9e0002 172 14 0 0 16 RIP 20 2 2 192 532 1074 33 769e0002 172 15 0 07 16 RIP 20 42 2 19223274 33 769e0002 192 41 0 24 RIP 20 2 2 19232 VIA 333 769e0002 192 14230724 RIP 20 2 2 192 32 174 33 7Tb9e0002 192 32 1 0 24 RIP 20 2 27192532 174 33 7Tb9e0002 Total Networks on Slot 2 268 The asterisk indicates best routes or routes currently used by IP 7 60 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Example bgp routes Enter the following command to display the entire BGP table of routes ip bgp_routes Network Mask Peer Rem Addr NextHop Address Org Loc Pref Best Used 4 0 0 0 8 be ers a ees ns es IGP 8183 BEST USED As Path SEQ 200 5 0 0 0 8 Di Di 2B De EEIE IGP 8183 As Path SEQ 300 SLOT 2 Total Nets 2 SLOT 5 Total Nets 7 When you specify the i p or ip_address options for the ip bgp_routes command the resulting display specifies the total number of networks plus the following additional information e Multi exit disc Multiple exit discriminator RFC1771 defines this as an optional nontransitive attribute that is a 4 octet nonnegative integer A BGP speaker uses the value of this attribute to help discriminate among multiple exits to a neighboring autonomous system AS e Aggregator RFC1771 defines this as an optional transitive attribute of
85. 21 3 5 62 usr mykernel exe bconfig config local 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Configuring Initial Interfaces and Netboot Operation You can use the ifconfig command to do the following e Configure the router s initial IP interface to the network You also use the same procedure to configure other synchronous interfaces for the network booting procedure e Configure Ethernet interfaces for the network booting procedure e Enable or disable network booting on an interface The following sections describe each use of the ifconfig command Configuring the Initial IP Synchronous Interface To Netboot the router you must first configure the router s initial IP synchronous interface to the network using the following interface configuration command ifconfig s lt s ot_no gt lt synchronous_options gt lt interface gt lt IP_address gt lt subnet_mask gt lt next_hop_address gt lt synchronous_options gt indicates some combination of the following settings d fr annexd Imi annexa int_clk Note You must separate command options with spaces You can use the same command format to configure other synchronous interfaces on the router for network booting Table 7 2 describes the ifconfig command arguments for configuring a router s synchronous interface 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 5 Using Technician Interface Software Table 7 2 Options for the ifconfi
86. 234 does not respond IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 is unreachable Pings the device at the IPX address 0xAB12 0xCD1234 eight successive times and waits up to 3 seconds for a response to each ping The console displays one of the following for each ping sent IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 is alive IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 does not respond IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 is unreachable The console also displays the following type of message after reporting the progress of each ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 responded to 100 success IPX ping 8 out of 8 3 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 OSI Ping Using Operating Commands When you issue the ping command for OSI the router sends a Connectionless Network Protocol CLNP echo request to the remote network service access point NSAP address you specify The remote device responds with a CLNP echo response if it can be reached and the console displays the response or the result of the request Enter the following to ping a remote device running OSI ping osi lt NSAP_address gt t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt lt NSAP_address gt is the required NSAP address in hexadecimal notation 0 9 A F of the remote device You do not need a leading Ox when entering the NSAP address t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt are optional These parameters are as follows lt timeout gt is the number of seconds for each ping to time out If the system receives a response to a ping after
87. 3 92 168 125 33 122 0 0 0 8 RIP 30 2 5 92 168 125 33 131 192 0 0 16 RIP 30 2 3 92 5168 6125 33 132 245 0 0 16 RIP 30 2 3 92 21 6821 25 33 134 177 0 0 16 RIP 30 2 3 92 468 125 33 140 200 0 0 16 RIP 30 2 3 922168 125 33 162 78 0 0 16 RIP 30 2 3 92 168 125 33 Total Networks on Slot 2 268 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 59 Using Technician Interface Software Data from the ip routes command excludes inactive or unused routes that exist in the complete table of IP routes To view the complete table including inactive and unused routes use the ip routes A command Example IP routes Enter the following command to display the entire table of routes including inactive unused and best routes ip routes A Network Mask Proto Age Sl Cost NextHop Address AS Weight raph yeas eee ee RG ee Pere a age eae ee a tet ae ee See alee oe Jesss ia 0 0 0 0 0 RIP 20 2 2 192 32 174 33 7b9e0002 0 0 0 0 0 Direct 385 0 131071 Unreachable ffffffff 0 0 0 0 32 Host N A 0 0 un IP cct 0 00000000 6 0 0 0 8 Direct 385 2 0 6 6 6 6 00000000 6 0 0 0 32 Host N A 2 0 Broadcast 00000000 6 6 6 6 32 Host N A 2 0 This Router 00000000 6 255 255 5255 7 32 Host N A 2 0 Broadcast 00000000 128 128 0 0 16 RIP 20 2 2 192 32 179 4 233 769e0002 129 128 0 0 16 RIP 20 2 2 192 32 174 33 769e0002 130 128 0 0 16 RIP 20 2 21924 32 174 33 7Tb9e0002 131 119 0 0 16 RIP 20 2 2 192 382 1074 633 769e0002 1 34 077 20 0716 RIP 20 2 2 192 32 174 33 769e0002
88. 5 26 23 GMT 12 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 39 Using Technician Interface Software The GMT offset is stored as a direction or and a value in hours and minutes Most time zone offset values are in hours and do not include minutes For example the eastern standard time EST zone is 5 hours behind GMT or GMT 5 Enter the following to change the date time and GMT offset date lt mm dd yy hh mm ss gt l hh mm The console displays the new date time and time zone offset If you do not enter a parameter for example the date the system uses the current system setting Note When you change the date time and GMT offset the GAME operating system distributes the new date and time to all processor modules Changing the GMT offset changes the timestamps of messages in the event log For example the GMT offset was 0 at 2 00 p m At 10 00 p m you access the event log to check the messages that came in between 2 00 and 10 00 If you then change the GMT offset to 2 the timestamp of each message in the event log is offset by 2 hours that is if the timestamp was 2 00 p m it changes to 12 00 p m Examples date The console displays the current system date time and time zone offset Aug 27 1997 16 00 GMT 4 date 08 29 97 16 02 The system date and time change to Aug 29 1997 16 02 date 08 29 97 16 02 5 The system date time and time zone offset change to Aug 29 1997 16 02 GMT 5 7 40 30
89. 7 34 Determining the Version of the Current Diagnostics PROM Image 7 34 Using the proni COmmMaAmg coiere nnee 7 35 Viewing the Load Addresses and Sizes of Applications c cccceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 38 Resetting the Date and Time AT PE T PET DaN settee ET aaa 89 Configuring NTP Using the Technician Interface ccccsscecesesseececsseeeeeeseneeeeesenaes 7 41 ee a oae e A E A E N A E T E TA 7 41 Enabling and Disabling SecurlD Authentication sesssessesireseserurrerirerurensinernnernrnnernana 7 43 Enabling Secun Auten te aan sprin E 7 43 Disabling SecurlD Authentication oegi aaran G aA T iisti atoia naai 7 45 Managing SNMP Secure Mode 2 iisnciacsedniacossatscandssiiseandoniiadanisricnaindentiet ended ecdieann 7 46 Setting the Router to Operate in Secure MOde 0 eeccecceceeeseeceeeeesnteeeeeeesteeeeeseaes 7 47 Setting the Encryption Key errr re E E Gen ee ET E 7 47 Resetting ihe Security Cuber serrinissnisis irni asiaan AAS 7 48 Customizing Hardware Compression Search Depth cccccesceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 7 48 Testing Compression and THROUGH DUE scsscssincdecccesntsccstctensiestedcndstingeeneeileensdoaees 7 49 WOP Seach Doph PaaS gaskets dab taipcle eng ENN 7 50 Displaying a Greeting or Notice Before the Login Prompt ee ies PT 7 52 Customizing the Technician Interface Welcome Message cecesteeeeteeeeeteeeeeneees 7 52 Recording Co
90. 8657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Configuring NTP Using the Technician Interface When you use the Technician Interface to configure the Network Time Protocol NTP you must configure NTP on each slot on the router to ensure that NTP initializes correctly You can configure NTP on each slot by setting the following MIB variable from the Technician Interface set wfProtocols 68 0 Oxffffffff commit 68 represents the wf NTPLoad attribute Assigning Passwords This section describes how to assign or reassign the Manager and User access passwords The Technician Interface runs on a single processor module When you assign a password the GAME operating system distributes the new password to nonvolatile RAM in all processor modules For this reason the system retains passwords if the Technician Interface runs subsequently on a different processor module after you booted the router reset a slot or replaced a board Note If you insert a new processor module you must reassign the Manager and User passwords otherwise the Technician Interface will not require passwords when it runs on that slot You can assign the User access password when you are logged in as User or Manager You can assign the Manager access password only when you are logged in as Manager Note Passwords as well as Technician Interface commands and file names are case sensitive 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 41 Using Technician Interface Soft
91. BayRS Version 14 00 Part No 308657 14 00 Rev 00 September 1999 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 Using Technician Interface Software NORTEL NETWORKS Copyright 1999 Nortel Networks All rights reserved Printed in the USA September 1999 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license A summary of the Software License is included in this document Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS is a trademark of Nortel Networks Bay Networks AN BCN BLN BN and FRE are registered trademarks and Advanced Remote Node ANH ARN ASN BayRS BaySecure BayStack BayStream BCC BCNX BLNX and System 5000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Win32 Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States
92. Cn wfHwldentities 3 wfHwAfn wfHwldentities 4 wfHwAn wfHwldentities 16 wfHwAnMpr wfHwAn 1 wfHwAnHub wfHwAn 2 wfHwBln wfHwidentities 16640 wfHwBcen wfHwldentities 16896 wfHwRbln wfHwidentities 17152 wfHwAsn wfHwlidentities 20480 wfHwAsnZ wfHwidentities 20736 wfHwAsnB wfHwldentities 20992 wfSoftwareConfig wfSwSeries7 2 wfSystem wfSwSeries7 3 wfSys wfSystem 1 wfServices wfSystem 2 wfPacketGenGroup wfServices 4 wfGameGroup wfServices 5 wfStaGroup wfServices 6 wfMibHeapGroup wfServices 7 wfCircuitNameExtension wfServices 9 wfNetBootGroup wfServices 10 wfNetbootCfgGroup wfNetbootCurrGroup wfSerialPortGroup wfServices 1 1 wfFileSystemGroup wfServices 12 wfPingGroup wfServices 13 wfRuiBootGroup wfServices 14 wfSyslogGroup wfServices 15 wfDCMmwGroup wfServices 16 wfStatsDcGroup Figure A 1 Sample Top Level Hierarchy of the Nortel Networks Router MIB continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 A 3 Using Technician Interface Software wfLine wfSwSeries7 4 wfCSMACDTable wfLine 1 wfWfTokenRingTable wfLine 2 wfAsyncTable wfLine 3 wfFddiTable wfLine 4 wfSyncTable wfLine 5 wfHwF Group wfLine 6 wfHssiTable wfLine 7 wfMcT1Group wfLine 8 wfDS1E1Group wfLine 9 wfDs1Group wfLine 12 wfDs3Group wfLine 13 wfSipGroup wfLine 1 4 wfSipPlcpGroup wfSipGroup 2 wfFddiGroup wfLine 15 wfFddiSmtGroup wfFddiGroup 1 wfFddiMacGroup wfFddiGroup 2 wfFddiPat
93. Delete a global parameter attribute as follows BN 3 set wfRuiBoot wfRuiBootBaseDelete 0 2 commit Restarting a Slot The restart command allows you to restart the GAME image currently in use on specified slots Restarting a slot does not reboot with a new router software image To restart a slot enter the slot number or numbers after the restart command To restart all slots do not specify a slot number when issuing the restart command Enter the following to restart the entire system restart Enter the restart command with one of the following parameters to restart a processor module or modules The lt s ot_no gt variable specifies the number of the slot where the processor module is located restart lt s ot_no gt restart lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt restart lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt 7 20 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Examples restart Restarts the entire system restart 1 Restarts slot 1 restart 1 5 Restarts slots 1 2 3 4 and 5 restart 4 6 Restarts slots 4 and 6 Resetting a System or Slot The reset command allows you to reboot one or more slots with a new router software image To reset one or more slots enter the slot number or numbers after the reset command If you do not enter a slot number when issuing the reset command the entire system reboots with the default router software image and configuration Entering the reset command without entering at least o
94. Disable lt host_ P_address gt lt 1 2 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 2 1 2 C 32 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Host UDP Port wfSyslogHostUDPPort 4 514 514 to 530 Identifies the UDP port of the remote host associated with this host entry Set the UDP port at which the remote host associated with this host entry will receive Syslog messages from the router set wfSyslogHostEntry wfSyslogHostUDPPort lt host_ IP_address gt lt 514 530 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 2 1 4 Host Log Facility wfSyslogHostLogFacility 5 184 LOCAL7 128 LOCALO 136 LOCAL I 144 LOCAL2 152 LOCAL3 160 LOCAL4 168 LOCALS 176 LOCAL6 184 LOCAL7 Specifies the UNIX system facility that receives and dispatches Syslog messages from the router Set the facility that you want the remote host to use for receiving and dispatching Syslog messages from the router Designate the same facility in the syslog conf file on the remote host set wfSyslogHostEntry wfSyslogHostLogFacility lt host_IP_address gt lt 128 136 144 152 1601 1681 176 184 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 2 1 5 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 33 Using Technician Interface S
95. FE 1300 0100 0004 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 0005 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 0006 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 0007 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 0008 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 0009 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 000A 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 000B 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 000B 0000 128 3FFE 1300 0100 000B Total routes 13 DIRECT INTERFACE 0000 5E10 AF4B 0101 128 INTERFACE Example ip6 routes i lt ifindex gt 0x739c0002 0x739c0002 0x739c0002 0x739c0002 0x739c0002 0x739c0002 0x739c0003 0x739c0003 0x739c0003 0x739c0002 0x1 0x0 0x0 Enter the following command to display data for all routes that use interface number 2 as the next hop interface for the route ip6 routes i2 Prefix Protocol 3FFE 1300 0002 0024 3FFE 1300 0002 0024 3FFE 1300 0002 0024 3FFE 1300 0002 0100 0000 64 0000 128 DIRECT INTERFACE 0200 A2FF FE02 9B25 128 INTERFACE 0000 64 RIPv6 0x1 0x0 0x0 0x739c0002 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 81 Using Technician Interface Software Example ip6 routes p lt protocol gt Enter the following command to display data for all dynamically learned adjacent node addresses ip6 routes pDN Next Hop Prefix Protocol Intis Weight FE80 0040 0522 128 DynNode 1 Ox7 fe0001 FE80 0006 A240 0522 128 DynNode 3 0x7ffe0001 FE80 5E10 AF47 0101 128 DynNode 9 0x7ffe0001 FE80 0200 A2FF FE0B AE7E 128 DynNode 2 0x7ffe0001 Total routes 4 Example ip6 routes I p lt protocol gt i lt ifindex gt
96. Fiber Distributed Data Interface first in first out frame relay frame relay switch File Transfer Protocol xxii 308657 14 00 Rev 00 GAME GMT HDLC HSSI ICMP IGMP IP IPX ISDN ISO LAN LAP B LED LLC LMI LNM LSP MAC MCTI MIB MOSY NML NSAP NVFS OSI OSPF PCMCIA PIN Preface Gate Access Management Entity Greenwich mean time high level data link control High Speed Serial Interface Internet Control Message Protocol Internet Group Membership Protocol Internet Protocol Internet Packet Exchange Protocol Integrated Services Digital Network International Organization for Standardization local area network Link Access Procedure Balanced light emitting diode Logical Link Control Protocol local management interface LAN Network Manager link state packet media access control Multichannel T1 management information base managed object syntax Native Mode LAN Protocol network service access point nonvolatile file system Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First Protocol Personal Computer Memory Card International Association personal identification number 308657 14 00 Rev 00 xxiii Using Technician Interface Software PPP PPX PROM QENET RAM RARP RIF RFC SAP SDLC SIMM SMDS SNAP SNMP SR SRM L STA STP SWS SYNC SYSCON TCP TCP IP Telnet TFTP TIP TP VC VINES Point to Point Protocol parallel packet exchange programmable read only memory Quad E
97. Files e disables the EOT verification Note To ensure that files are transferred properly do not issue the xmodem command with the lt wait gt parameter when you perform out of band file transfers to or from a Windows workstation that has Wfterm running on it 3 Set the sending Wfterm utility into send mode by choosing YMODEM Send from the File Transfers menu Choosing this option opens the File to Transfer window as shown in Figure B 10 4 Select the drive directory and file you want to send to the router 5 Click on OK Clicking on OK initiates the file transfer to the router You verify that the file transfer was successful when you see the File Transfer Completed message in the Wfterm base program window If the transfer was unsuccessful you should see the message File Transfer Aborted You can enter a dir command at the Technician Interface command line prompt to verify that the file you sent now exists in the router disk or memory card volume you set in step 4 6 If you are finished transferring files from the workstation to the router enter logout at the Technician Interface command line prompt in the Wfterm starting window At the conclusion of file transfer operations you can close the connection between the workstation and the router See Closing the Connection on page B 30 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 29 Using Technician Interface Software Closing the Connection You can gracefully
98. Flags for the Xmodem Command Option Flag Meaning or Action y Selects the YMODEM batch protocol for sending files Sends in sequence any list of files you specify in the Technician Interface command line Selects the MODEM7 batch protocol for sending files Uses 1 kB packets on transmit Selects CRC mode on receive 3 Causes the Technician Interface to wait 15 seconds before initiating the startup handshake which in turn starts the specified file transfer operation If you are using a 386 486 DOS PC as a workstation you trigger the initial handshake by selecting Ymodem Send or Ymodem Receive from the File Transfers menu l When specified in the command line inhibits the logging of YMODEM events in the system log Automatic logging is a default mechanism of the XMODEM YMODEM protocols When you enable logging by not specifying the I flag in the command line log messages for significant events errors and retries are sent to the system log The log messages can be useful for troubleshooting p Prints displays information and events pertaining to the YMODEM batch file transfer in progress UNIX only n Allows CAN CAN x x aborts during midtransfer Otherwise the YMODEM protocol allows CAN CAN aborts only at the beginning of a file transfer operation e Disables EOT verification when transferring files to the router DOS only B 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out o
99. Group 3 wflpPolicyGroup wflpRouting 6 wfTcpGroup wflnternet 3 wfUdpGroup wflnternet 4 wfSnmpGroup wflinternet 5 wfTftp wflnternet 6 wfTelnetGroup wflnternet 7 Figure A 1 Sample Top Level Hierarchy of the Nortel Networks Router MIB continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 A 5 Using Technician Interface Software wflnternet wfBootpGroup wflInternet 8 wfBootpClientGroup wfBootpGroup 1 wfBootpServerGroup wfBootpGroup 2 wfBootpRelayAgentGroup wfBootpGroup 3 wfRarpGroup wflnternet 9 wfFtpGroup wflnternet 10 wfNetBlOS IpGroup wflnternet 11 wfDvmrpGroup wflnternet 12 wflgmpGroup wflnternet 13 wfPimGroup wflnternet 14 wflpv6Group wflnternet 16 wfAppletalkGroup wfApplication 4 wflpxGroup wfApplication 5 wfOsiGroup wfApplication 6 wfVinesGroup wfApplication 8 wfWanGroup wfApplication 9 wfFrameRelayGroup wfWanGroup 1 wfPppGroup wfWanGroup 2 wfX25Group wfWanGroup 4 wfAtmGroup wfWanGroup 5 wfAtmLeGroup wfAtmGroup 20 wfFrswGroup wfWanGroup 6 wfSmdsSwGroup wfWanGroup 7 wflsdnGroup wfWanGroup 8 wfFrameRelay2Group wfWanGroup 9 wfXnsGroup wfApplication 10 wfLanManagerGroup wfApplication 12 wfAppnGroup wfApplication 1 4 wflpexGroup wfApplication 15 wflntegratedServicesGroup wfApplication 16 wfRRedGroup wfApplication 17 wfBotGroup wfApplication 18 wfAccountingGroup wfApplication 20 Figure A 1 TSOO19A Sample Top Level Hierarchy of Nortel Ne
100. ICULAR PURPOSE Licensee is responsible for the security of its own data and information and for maintaining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstruct lost or altered files data or programs 4 Limitation of liability INNO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT 308657 14 00 Rev 00 iii SHALL THE LIABILITY OF NORTEL NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO NORTEL NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE 5 Government Licensees This provision applies to all Software and documentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 and the limitations set out
101. ID Maximum Hosts wfSyslogMaxHosts 4 5 1 to 10 Specifies the maximum number of remote hosts considered active and able to receive messages from the Syslog service on the router The number includes Syslog hosts configured to receive time sequenced messages as well as hosts configured to receive messages nonsequentially Enter the maximum number of active hosts allowed to receive messages from Syslog on the router The actual number of entries in the host table can exceed the value of wfSyslogMaxHosts but Syslog will forward messages only to the first n active hosts where n equals the current setting of wfSyslogMaxHosts Increasing the value of wfSyslogMaxHosts increases the overhead processing requirements for Syslog on the router set wfSyslog wfSyslogMaxHosts 0 lt 1 10 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 1 4 Log Poll Timer WfSyslogPollTimer 5 5 seconds 5 to 610000 Determines the amount of time Syslog waits before initiating another cycle to poll all slots for event messages logged since the previous polling cycle Enter the number of seconds that you want Syslog to wait between polling cycles set wfSyslog wfSyslogPollTimer 0 lt 5 610000 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 1 5 C 30 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Host Parameters This section describes parameters you can configure for each host you add to the Syslog host table list of remote UNIX hosts Par
102. If you do not enter a destination name the system defaults to the source file name 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System Examples tftp put 192 32 1 62 Sends a copy of config2 cfg from volume 2 2 config2 cfg 3 newconf to newconf in volume 3 on the remote node at the IP address 192 32 1 62 tftp get 192 32 1 62 Requests a copy of config2 cfg from volume 2 of the 2 config2 cfg remote node at the IP address 192 32 1 62 and stores the copy in the current working directory tftp put 192 32 1 62 Sends a copy of config2 cfg to config2 cfg in volume 2 config2 cfg wfTftp 2 0 on the remote node at the IP address 192 32 1 62 tftp put 192 32 1 62 Sends a copy of 2 config2 cfg but puts it on volume 3 2 config2 cfg 3 config3 cfg and calls it config3 cfg After transferring the file you can copy it at the source to its original name If the new file at the destination is a configuration file or an executable file verify its integrity by booting with it If the system boots and loads the configuration without problems you can rename or copy the file name at the destination to its original name You can also load a file onto the router by specifying the router host name and volume using the following command tftp put lt remote_file gt lt host_name gt lt local_vol gt lt local_file gt This method is useful if the wfTftp 2 0 attribute for the default volume was not set during the Quick Start procedure Example I
103. LN 2 BCN AN ANH ARN and ASN The default router software images are bn exe an exe arn exe asn exe and s5000 exe Use the cfg file extension for alternative configuration files The default configuration file is config se the al file extension for alias files U Use the log file extension for log files U se the bat file extension for script files 308657 14 00 Rev 00 4 5 Using Technician Interface Software Displaying the Status of All Memory Cards Enter dinfo to display the status of all memory cards currently installed in the router Figure 4 1 shows a sample dinfo display of a system with memory cards installed in slots 2 and 5 S STATE TOTAL SIZE FREE SPACE CONTIG FREE SPACE FORMATTED 2097152 228663 220209 FORMATTED 4194304 1356883 1356883 P TS0010A Figure 4 1 Sample Dinfo Display The dinfo command displays the following data Vol Slot number where the memory card is currently installed Vol is short for volume State Either formatted or corrupted If you purchase a card from another supplier the dinfo display may list it as corrupted If a card is corrupted format it See Formatting a Memory Card on page 4 18 for instructions Total Size Total number of bytes used and unused in the memory card Free Space Number of unused bytes in the memory card Contig Free Space Number of unused bytes in the largest block of available space in the memory card
104. MIB value changes e Save the configuration in RAM to a file for later retrieval when booting e Use the MIB II counter Listing MIB Objects You can display MIB object names and their associated identifiers using the list command When you want to display or change a MIB value but do not know its object or attribute name use this command To display a list of all MIB object names and identifiers enter the following command list 308657 14 00 Rev 00 6 1 Using Technician Interface Software To display a list of attributes and their associated identifiers enter list lt object_name gt where lt object_name gt is the name of the object at the level above the attributes Finally you can display a list of instance identifiers using the list command Enter the list command with the following parameters to display a list of instance identifiers list instances lt object_name gt or list i lt object_name gt instances or i represents the optional key word instances lt object_name gt is the name of the object at the level above the attributes Examples list Displays all object names and their associated object identifiers wfCSMACDEntry 1 3 6 1 oles oo RE EA REI wfFddiEntry 1 3 6 1 4 3 4 4 1 wfFddiSmtEntry IESE E N S E A 6 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 list w CSMACDEnitry list instances wfCSMACDEntry list i w CSMACDEnitry Accessing the MIB Displays all attribu
105. NIX workstation For example cd a designates diskette volume a or cd 2 designates a memory card volume in router slot 2 Enter a dir command to view the list of files in the volume memory card The system displays a screen similar to the following table File Name Size Date Day Time abc cfg 1814 10 28 94 Thurs 10 29 06 def cfg 2293 11 03 94 Wed TTS LEs29 ghi cfg 4197 11 15 94 Mon 08 34 04 Determine which files you need to transfer from the router to the workstation Enter the xmodem send binary command as follows xmodem sby lt source_vol gt lt filename gt sb is a send binary file y is the YMODEM file transfer option lt source_vol gt is either a slot number of a memory card or the letter of the disk drive volume that contains the files you want to send to the workstation lt filename gt is the name of the file you want to send from the router to the workstation If you want to enter multiple file names as part of a YMODEM batch file transfer operation insert a space character between the file names Note To ensure that files are transferred properly do not issue the xmodem command with the lt wait gt parameter when you perform out of band file transfers to or from a Windows workstation that has Wfterm running on it B 26 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files 5 To set the receiving Wfterm utility into receive mode choose YMODEM Receive from the File Transf
106. ODEM Send PgUp ZMODEM Receive ZMODEM Send ZMODEMD Receive 7MODFMD Send Figure B 9 Wfterm File Transfer Operation Selection Window Note Because the Wfterm utility provides more functionality than is required gt to support YMODEM file transfers the File Transfers menu contains options for up to fourteen different file transfer operations However to transfer files between a workstation and a Nortel Networks router you need only the ymodem send and ymodem receive options This section provides only the information you need for the YMODEM options Transferring Files from a Router to a PC Workstation To transfer one or more files from a router to your Site Manager workstation you must 1 Be logged in to the Technician Interface of the appropriate router See Logging In to the Router s Technician Interface on page B 24 2 Select the disk volume or memory card volume that contains the files you want to transfer to your workstation Set the receiving Wfterm utility into receive mode 4 Trigger or initiate the file transfer from the router to your workstation 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 25 Using Technician Interface Software Proceed as follows to transfer one or more files from a router to your workstation 1 Enter a cd command to designate the disk volume or memory card volume that contains the files you want to transfer to your U
107. P 3 continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 11 Using Technician Interface Software Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system bgp3nexthop Displays the NEXT_HOP attribute of each network advertisement received via BGP 3 bgp3metric Displays the INTER_AS_METRIC attribute of each network advertisement received via BGP 3 cctnames ccttypes Displays all circuit names Displays all circuits and their types The types are 10 CSMACD 20 SYNC 30 T1 40 E1 50 Token 60 FDDI decadjs decadj lt index gt Displays all DECnet adjacent nodes and their respective adjacency table indexes The following example shows one line in the display where 6145 is the index 2 is the area and 3 is the node wfivAdjEntry wfivAdjNodeAddr 6145 7 Be Displays DECnet adjacency information about the index you enter You can obtain the lt index gt by using the decadjs alias decarts Displays all known DECnet areas and the next hop to each of these areas decarinf lt area gt Displays DECnet area information for the area you enter decbase Displays DECnet global configuration parameters base record decdr Displays the designated router address for each DECnet interface decnrts Displays DECnet Level 1 routing node information decninf lt area node gt Displays DECnet information about the node whose area and node number you en
108. P_address gt 1 commit Note Only hosts represented by entries that are ENABLED wfSyslogHostDisable 1 and have an operational state of ACTIVE wfSyslogHostOperState 1 receive messages from Syslog on the router Next add an entity filter for the host entry you just added Task 6 Adding an Entity Filter for a Remote Host Once you define a host in the Syslog host table add define an entity specific message filter for the host If this is not the first filter for a given entity and remote host pair first obtain a list of filter instances as follows list i wfSyslogEntFltrEntry From the resulting list of instance IDs of the form lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt determine the next lt filter_index gt number available to assign to a new filter for a given lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt pair The number you assign to the new filter will have a value of one higher than the highest lt filter_index gt in the list 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 17 Using Technician Interface Software Now proceed to step 1 1 Create a new filter for the desired entity and remote host pair by first creating an entry in the Syslog Entity Filter table as follows set WfSyslogEntityFilterTable WfSyslogEntFltrDelete lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt 1 commit lt host_IP_address gt is the IP address of the desired remote host a management workstation
109. RN and ASN routers The following guides collectively provide complete instructions for setting up Netboot and Directed Netboot on an AN ANH ARN or ASN router Installing and Operating BayStack AN and ANH Systems Installing and Operating BayStack ARN Routers Connecting ASN Routers to a Network Configuring BayStack Remote Access Connecting ASN Routers to a Network You need to use the ifconfig and bconfig commands to configure the AN ANH ARN and ASN routers Use the ifconfig command to configure the router s initial IP interface to the network Use the bconfig command to specify the location and name of the router software image and configuration file 7 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Configuring the Boot Source To use Directed Netboot you must use the beonfig command to specify the following e The IP address of the server where the router s software image and configuration file reside e The full path name of the software image and configuration file You must use the bconfig command once to specify the location of the software image and again to specify the location of the configuration file Use one of the following formats for the beonfig command bconfig image config local network lt 7FTP_host gt lt TFTP_pathname gt bconfig d image config Table 7 1 describes command options for the bconfig command 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 3 Using Technician Interface Software
110. Syslog entity filter table Return to Task 5 to add another remote host or return to task 6 to add another entity filter for the remote host otherwise go to Task 8 Save to a file on an NVFS volume the Syslog additions to your configuration Log out of the Technician Interface session The next sections describe the Syslog configuration sequence in greater detail Following the configuration procedure this appendix provides an example of Syslog configuration plus definitions of Syslog attributes you use during configuration Task 1 Logging In to the Router s Technician Interface For information about how to open a Technician Interface session with a Nortel Networks router see Chapter 1 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Task 2 Defining a Slot Mask for Syslog on the Router Before creating the Syslog entity on the router define a slot mask for Syslog The slot mask identifies the slots on which the system will load and run the Syslog entity At the Technician Interface prompt enter set wfProtocols wfSYSLLoad 0 0x7FFE0000 commit This command enables Syslog to run on all slots regardless of the router model Next create the Syslog entity on the router Task 3 Creating Syslog on the Router Create the Syslog entity in the router configuration as follows set wfSyslog wfSyslogDelete 0 1 commit This also enables Syslog on the router The system sets the attribute wfSyslogD
111. Technician Interface Scripts SS SNS atmarp backplane bconfig boot cd v clearlog commit compact copy cutenv see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v date v delete diags dinfo v dir v Fo e Sf Ne Pd als Sh Sd OR Sey SG s continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Table 7 13 Technician Interface Access Levels continued Command User Manager disable see Using Technician Interface Scripts v echo see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v enable see Using Technician Interface Scripts v enumenv see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v exec v export see Writing Technician Interface Scripts y v format v get v v getenv see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v gosub see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v y goto see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v help y v history v v if see Writing Technician Interface Scripts y v ifconfig y instenv see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v ip v v ip6 v v let see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v list v v loadmap v y log v v logout v y mibget see Writing Technician Interface Scripts v v more v v continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 85 Using Technician Interface Software
112. Using Technician Interface Software Note If you add another filter for a specific entity that filter takes precedence over the wildcard filter for the host you specified When the wildcard filter transitions to the INACTIVE state the new filter transitions to the ACTIVE state and the remote host receives messages only through the entity specific filter Syslog Parameter Descriptions Syslog objects and key parameters attributes that you can set on the router or get from the router by means of Technician Interface commands exist in the router MIB in the following hierarchy wfSyslog group or global parameters pertaining to Syslog operation wfSyslogDelete wfSyslogDisable wfSyslogOperState wfSyslogMaxHosts wfSyslogPollTimer wfSyslogHostTable table or list of remote host destinations for Syslog wfSyslogHostEntry individual remote host entry in the host table wfSyslogHostDelete wfSyslogHostDisable wfSyslogHostDest wfSyslogHostUDPPort wfSyslogHostLogFacility wfSyslogTimeSeqEnable wfSyslogHostOperState C 26 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events wfSyslogEntityFilterTable table of entity filters for one host wfSyslogEntFltrEntry individual entity filter entry in the entity filter table wfSyslogEntFltrDelete wfSyslogEntFltrDisable wfSyslogEntFltrHostIndex wfSyslogEntFltrNum wfSyslogEntFltrIndex wfSyslogEntFltrOperState wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd
113. _value gt as an alias executes This command is useful for locating syntax errors within the lt alias_value gt Enter the following to display the verbose mode verbose If the verbose mode is on the system displays the commands as they execute If the verbose mode is off the system does not display the commands Enter the following to change the setting of the verbose mode where on loff is on to display alias commands or off to turn off the display verbose on off Examples verbose Displays Verbose mode on or Verbose mode off verbose on Displays alias commands when they execute verbose off Does not display alias commands when they execute Deleting an Alias from Memory The unalias command removes the specified alias from memory If you substitute the wildcard character for the alias name the system removes all aliases from memory Enter the following to delete aliases from RAM unalias lt alias name gt lt alias name gt is the name of the command you want to delete represents all aliases 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 7 Using Technician Interface Software Examples unalias scroll Deletes the alias named scroll unalias Deletes all aliases from memory Saving Aliases to a File You can copy all aliases residing in RAM to a file on a volume for later retrieval Enter the following to create an alias file save aliases lt vol gt lt filename gt lt vol gt is the volume that will store the ali
114. able shows one way to map UNIX system error codes and error levels to the severity levels of event messages from Nortel Networks routers Suggested Mapping to Nortel Networks Router UNIX System UNIX System Error Event Message Severity Error Codes Levels Levels 1 LOG_EMERG Fault 2 LOG_ALERT Warning 3 LOG_CRIT Warning 4 LOG_ERR Warning 5 LOG_WARNING Warning 6 LOG_NOTICE Info 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events LOG_INFO Info LOG_DEBUG Debug Trace You determine how the severity levels of Nortel Networks router event messages map to error levels on your UNIX workstation based on requirements of the network management application software you want to use See Configuring Syslog on the Router on page C 14 for instructions on how to map router event messages to UNIX system facility and error level codes Time Sequencing Syslog Messages If you enable the message time sequencing feature Syslog on each slot Polls that slot for event messages logged since the previous polling attempt Filters all event messages retrieved via polling Reformats router event messages into Syslog message format Forwards Syslog messages to a sequencer gate which arranges in timestamp order any messages it receives Forwards sequenced messages from the router to the appropriate remote hosts Without sequencing Syslog polls filters reformats
115. able slot on a multislot system or to the same slot on a single slot system Logging In When you access the Technician Interface via Telnet or console session you encounter up to three levels of router access security e User Manager Login Telnet and console access e Password Authentication Telnet and console access e SecurID Authentication Telnet access only User Manager Login To access the Technician Interface on a Nortel Networks router you must enter one of the following commands at the login prompt that appears in your Telnet or console display Login User or Login Manager 308657 14 00 Rev 00 1 3 Using Technician Interface Software Note You must press the return key after every Technician Interface command Technician Interface commands and passwords are case sensitive Use upper and lowercase as indicated The User login entry allows you to enter read only commands These only read information from the router The Manager login entry allows you to enter any Technician Interface commands Certain commands read information from the router and or write information to the router We recommend limiting Manager access to network managers and the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center The section Technician Interface Commands and Access Levels in Chapter 7 lists all of the Technician Interface commands and their associated access requirements Login with Password If you enable password au
116. access to the software image and configuration file during a cold start A cold start occurs when you cycle the power on the router or after you enter the diags command Each FRE module BLN BLN 2 BCN in a router can host one memory card Multiple memory cards are optional in the router The section that follows suggests how to manage multiple memory cards A volume number is the same number as the slot that hosts the memory card For example volume 2 resides on slot 2 Table 4 1 outlines the NVFS commands The Wildcard column indicates whether you can use wildcards and when entering the commands You use wildcards to display multiple file names and to copy or delete multiple files The wildcards have the same meaning as those in UNIX e The wildcard matches any number of characters including zero characters e The wildcard matches any single character A match occurs only when a character is present in the position indicated by the wildcard The sections that follow describe the commands in detail They also show how to use the wildcards 4 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System Table 4 1 NVFS Commands Command Wildcard Function compact Reallocates file space on a memory card cd Changes the active volume copy A Copies a file from one volume to another or to the same volume delete U Deletes a file from a volume dinfo Displays the volume number statu
117. ages may be different on each slot for this reason The BGP routing table you select by specifying appropriate command flags Lists routes announced to various configured BGP peers cache The routing cache you select by specifying appropriate command flags The cache subcommand requires an interface address For unnumbered interfaces use 0 0 0 0 with the circuit option dvmrp_caches The DVMRP routing caches for a particular slot You must specify a slot number with this command mim ospf_Isdb The Multicast Table Manager MTM forwarding cache entries for a particular slot You must specify a slot number with this command The contents of the ospf_Isdb you select by specifying appropriate command flags lt flags gt lt IP_address gt lt IP_address prefix gt a lt area_address gt A e lt circuit_no gt i lt BGP_router_ID gt M n N p lt ocal_peer_address remote peer address gt R lt simplified_regular_expression gt S lt source_address gt s lt slot_number gt t lt type_number gt The lt flags gt apply to subcommands as described in Table 7 7 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 57 Using Technician Interface Software Table 7 7 Flag Descriptions Applicable Flag Filtering Effect Subcommands lt address gt Retrieves data for IP addresses that match your routes bgp_routes address entry in dotted decimal notat
118. ages that meet the requirements of entity filters you configure on the router Maps into Syslog message format messages retrieved from the local events log Inserts a priority code into each reformatted message Time sequences messages if you first enabled the message sequencing feature Forwards messages to IP on the router which in turn forwards messages to remote hosts identified in the Syslog host table At a remote UNIX management workstation Syslogd Receives Syslog messages from Nortel Networks routers Examines the priority code in each message Uses the priority code to determine appropriate system handling for each message Based on the priority code in each message dispatches each message to any or all of the following destinations Workstation display Local log file Designated printer One or more remote hosts C 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Router e Retrieves event messages e Filters retrieved messages e Maps retrieved messages into Syslog message format e Forwards Syslog messages to remote hosts Outgoing wW Syslog messages 7 i IP network gt Remote Host Unix Workstation workstation ea Se ea N oe E SH Message printed 5 Message m i Disk logged e Logs displays prints and or forwards messages i Message Ce RC rSe Ses n sr displayed TS0001B F
119. ally saving the 5 9 command 5 5 5 12 input filters 5 3 displaying list of 5 5 ouput filters 5 5 login levels 1 3 Manager s Script 2 15 procedure 1 3 retries 2 14 script search path 2 14 timeout 2 12 timeout guidelines 1 11 User s Script 2 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 with password 1 4 with Secure ID 1 5 Login Script Search Path 2 14 logout command 1 12 setting 2 17 loopback 3 8 3 11 M Management Information Base See MIB manager session command access levels 7 84 to 7 87 starting from within user session 1 13 terminating 1 12 Manager s Login Script parameter 2 15 Manager s login script setting 2 15 memory buffer 5 2 displaying the status of volumes 4 6 formatting 4 18 partitioning 4 19 transferring files to a full card 4 19 using multiple cards 4 3 menu command 1 13 messages mapping router events to Syslog format C 8 time sequencing Syslog C 34 MIB 1 13 accessing 6 1 to 6 8 committing sets 6 8 compliance with specifications A 7 getting values 6 4 to 6 6 implementation notes A 8 to A 10 listing objects 6 1 to 6 4 Nortel Networks files A 7 setting values 6 6 to 6 8 structure of A 2 to A 5 using A 1 to A 10 MIB II counter 6 9 modem enabling 2 10 monitor command 1 13 more command 3 2 Index 5 Motorola processor module 4 4 mtm command 7 57 N named boot 7 11 NLSP ping response 3 14 nonvolatile file system NVFS 4 1 NSAP address
120. als in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Nortel Networks and its licensors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee shall not sublicense assign or otherwise disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Nortel Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license 3 Limited warranty Nortel Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Nortel Networks and properly installed and operated on Nortel Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licensed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Nortel Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Nortel Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date Software is
121. ame wfSerialPortName 5 None Set by the system The name that the system assigns to the port Users may not specify a name You can use this name to correlate the port number to the name printed on the hardware next to the physical port connection You cannot change this parameter get wfSerialPortEntry 5 lt port_no gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 5 Port Slot wfSerialPortSlot 6 None Set by the system The slot on which the login session for the console port is running The system sets this number You cannot change this parameter get wfSerialPortEntry 6 lt port_no gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 7 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Port Type wfSerialPortType T 1 Technician Interface 1 Technician Interface 2 Printer Configures the port for either Technician Interface Console or Modem or Printer The Printer option is not supported at this time Set according to your console requirements set wfSerialPortEntry 7 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 7 Baud Rate wfSerialPortBaudRate 8 9600 9600 4800 1200 I 600 300 Specifies the rate of data transfer between the console and the router S
122. ameter Host Delete Attribute Name wfSyslogHostDelete Attribute Number 1 Default 1 Create Options 1 Create 2 Delete Function Adds or deletes a remote host entry in the Syslog host table Parameters associated with this entry collectively define a remote host that will receive Syslog event messages from the router Instructions Set to 1 to add a host to the Syslog host table Set to 2 to delete a host from the Syslog host table Command set wfSyslogHostEniry wfSyslogHostDelete lt host_ P_address gt lt 1 2 gt 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 31 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Messaging Enable wfSyslogHostDisable 2 1 Enable 1 Enable 2 Disable Enables or disables message forwarding from Syslog to the remote host associated with this host entry Set to 1 to enable message forwarding from Syslog to the remote host associated with this host entry Set to 2 to disable message forwarding from Syslog to the remote host associated with this host entry You can also stop forwarding router events to the host by deleting the host See the Host Delete parameter wfSyslogHostDelete on page C 31 If you delete a remote host and later decide you want to forward router events to that host you must add the remote host again to the Syslog host table set wfSyslogHostEniry wfSyslogHost
123. ances of the wfSerialPortEntry object Each instance corresponds to one of the 14 possible hub slots Enable the log autosave feature only on one slot occupied by a Model 5380 5580 router in a System 5000 hub Multiple 5380 5580 boards installed in the same System 5000 hub operate as one logical router if that hub contains an ATM PPX backplane Note If the System 5000 does not contain an ATM PPX backplane each Model 5380 5580 board operates as an independent router In this case you can configure the log autosave feature on each Model 5380 5580 board independently 5 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Event Logs Configuring the Log Autosave Feature Proceed as follows to enable and customize operation of the log autosave feature 1 Determine how you want to configure the log autosave feature based on descriptions of wfSerialPortEntry attributes wfSerialPortAutoSaveNumFiles and wfSerialPortAutoSave Volume e Log autosave platform differences see previous section Open a Technician Interface session with the router Enter the command shown for each attribute followed by a commit command Close the Technician Interface session when you finish configuring the log autosave feature Repeat this procedure for any Nortel Networks router on which you need to enable the log autosave feature For more explanation of the Technician Interface set and commit commands see Using the set Command and Using the
124. and waits up to 5 seconds default for a response The console displays one of the following messages AT ping 100 5 is alive AT ping 100 5 does not respond AT ping 100 5 is unreachable Pings the device at the AppleTalk address 100 5 eight successive times and waits up to 3 seconds for a response to each ping The console displays one of the following for each ping sent AT ping 100 5 is alive AT ping 100 5 does not respond AT ping 100 5 is unreachable The console also displays the following type of message after reporting the progress of each ping AT ping 100 5 responded to 8 out of 8 100 success 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 25 Using Technician Interface Software APPN Ping When you issue the ping command for APPN to a remote APPN device the console displays the response from the remote device if the ping reaches the device or the result of the request APPN ping uses the APING APPN Ping Transaction Program TP to send an APING request to the APINGD TP running on the remote device Enter the following to ping a remote device running APPN ping appn lt CP_names gt t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt m lt mode name gt lt CP_name gt is the required APPN address in the format of a Control Point name of the remote device Use the format lt network_ID gt lt CP_name gt if the remote device is not on the same network as the system you are pinging from t lt timeou
125. and forwards messages from each slot to IP on the router IP forwards the messages in retrieved order to the appropriate remote hosts Syslog Message Handling on a Workstation Syslogd on your management workstation uses the priority code in each locally received Syslog message to Determine that the message came from an external source a Nortel Networks router in an IP network accessible to the workstation rather than from an internal source such as the workstation s email system or line printer spooling system Determine whether to redispatch the message to a local log file to the workstation display to a printer or to another remote UNIX host 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Syslogd makes these determinations by examining the two parts of the priority code facility error in each message See Configuring Syslog on the Router on page C 14 for instructions on how to enable the Syslog time sequencing feature Note Enable time sequencing only when it is important for your management workstation to receive router event messages in timestamped order rather than in order of retrieval from each slot When you enable the time sequencing feature Syslog requires more processing resources from the router Configuring Syslogd on a UNIX Workstation Before you configure and activate Syslog on any routers configure Syslogd on UNIX network management workstations in your network This helps t
126. and revision level of router ipfwd Displays the age of each entry in the IP forwarding table ipfwdage Displays the age of each entry in the IP forwarding table ipfwdas Displays the next hop AS of each entry in the IP forwarding table ipfwdmetric Displays the metric of each entry in the IP forwarding table iproutes Displays all IP networks that are known and the next hop iphops Displays all IP networks that are known and their associated hop counts iphosts Displays all configured adjacent IP hosts iparp Displays all MAC addresses and associated ARP addresses in the router s ARP cache ipifs Displays all IP interfaces and their associated indexes ipif lt address index gt Displays all IP information for the IP interface address you enter For example enter the following where 192 32 10 10 is the first interface ipif 192 32 10 10 1 You can obtain the lt address index gt by using the ipifs alias ipsroutes Displays all IP static routes configured in the node ipstats Displays all IP receive and IP transmit packet statistics continued 8 14 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Aliases Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system ipx_intf Enables or disables a specific IPX interface 1 Enable 2 Disable ipx_if lt interface_ID gt ipx_route lt nstance_ID gt Displays the IPX interface record for the specified i
127. ansfer from the router to the workstation 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software 10 Enter the xmodem send binary command as follows xmodem sby lt source_vol gt lt filename gt lt filename gt sb is a send binary file y is the YMODEM file transfer option lt source_vol gt is either a slot number of a memory card or the letter of the disk drive volume that contains the files you want to send to the workstation lt filename gt is the name of the file you want to send from the router to the workstation If you want to enter multiple file names as part of a YMODEM batch file transfer operation insert a space between the file names For more information about Technician Interface file name specifications see Chapter 4 Type c tilde c to escape momentarily from the Technician Interface command line prompt to the UNIX workstation command line prompt The workstation responds Local command Enter an xmodem receive binary command with the print display transfer events and information option flag p set in the command line as follows xmodem rbyp lt filename gt lt filename gt rb is a receive binary file y is the YMODEM file transfer option p prints displays important information and events pertaining to the file transfer s you are about to initiate lt filename gt lt filename gt are the optional file names you want to assign to files when they reach the wo
128. as file lt filename gt is the name of the alias file Example save aliases 2 aliases 1 Creates a file named aliases 1 on volume 2 and copies the aliases from RAM to this file Note The command alias precedes the alias name and alias text for each entry in the file allowing you to run the file as a script file 8 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Aliases Loading Aliases from a File You can use the source aliases command to load the aliases from a file residing on the volume to active RAM The aliases already residing in memory remain in memory however the system overwrites any aliases in memory that have duplicate names Use the unalias command if you want to delete all aliases from memory before entering the source aliases command Enter the following to load aliases source aliases lt vol gt lt filename gt lt vol gt is the volume storing the alias file lt filename gt is the name of the file that contains aliases Example source aliases 2 aliases 1 or Loads the aliases contained in the run 2 aliases 1 or aliases 1 file which is stored on source 2 aliases 1 volume 2 Note With Version 7 70 or later router software running you can use the source aliases command to load alias files created in any version of Series 7 or later router software You cannot however use earlier releases of router software to read alias files created with Version 7 70 or later software 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 9
129. ate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is ping lt p_address gt you enter ping 192 32 10 12 Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter Example Enter show ip alerts routes Example Use the dinfo command Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option You must choose only one of the options Do not type the braces when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you must enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip interfaces alerts you can enter either show ip interfaces or show ip interfaces alerts XX 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Preface ellipsis points Indicate that you repeat the last element of the command as needed Example If the command syntax is ethernet 2 1 lt parameter gt lt value gt you enter ethernet 2 1 and as many parameter value pairs as needed italic text Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax i
130. ation when using multiline ifAdminStatus ifOperStatus ifMTU and ifPhysAddress ifAdminStatus and ifOperStatus return UP if at least one interface is up All interfaces must be down before DOWN is returned The ifMTU value returned is the minimum MTU for the circuit group and the ifPhysAddress is the physical address of the first interface in the circuit to initialize A 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using the Nortel Networks Router MIB ifSpecific ipAddrEntry ipRouteEntry Supported Traps The object identifier that points to an instance of the first conceptual column in the appropriate proprietary media MIB In certain circumstances the index to this table ip AdEntAddr may not be sufficient to uniquely identify a particular instance In these situations the attribute ipAdEntIfIndex is appended to the instance identifier for subsequent entries with the same index The instance identifier for the MIB II routing table ipRouteDest is insufficient to uniquely identify all possible routes to a given destination The MIB II routing table therefore contains only a representative sample of the total routing table For a more accurate description of the system s IP routes see wflpForward Entry 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 2 1 16 1 which is indexed by destination address destination subnet mask route source policy and next hop address The following generic traps are supported by the software coldStart warmsStart linkUp
131. ches the volumes you specify with the Login Script Search Path parameter set wfSerialPortEntry 29 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 29 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 15 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID User s Login Script wfSerialPortUserAutoScript 30 None None or autouser bat A script named autouser bat exists within the Technician Interface software You can use the script as is or you can modify it to suit your requirements Executes the user s login script file automatically at login If you did not change the name of the user s login script file accept the default Otherwise enter the name of your user s login script file This name can have up to eight characters followed by up to a three character extension If the login script file does not contain a volume specification the system searches the volumes you specify with the Login Script Search Path parameter set wfSerialPortEntry 30 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 30 2 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Configuring th
132. close the connection between your workstation and a target router after you e Finish transferring downloading or uploading files between the remote router and your workstation e Log off the Technician Interface of the target router To close a connection choose Hangup from the Wfterm File menu see Figure B 7 on Figure B 7 When the connection closes the Wfterm Connection Closed window appears as shown in Figure B 11 Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program File Modem Phone File Transfers Help WfTerm i Connection closed Figure B 11 Wfterm Connection Closed Window At any time you can also close a connection simply by quitting the Wfterm utility Once you close the connection between your workstation and the target router you can quit the Wfterm program as described in the next section B 30 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files Quitting Wfterm You can quit the Wfterm utility after you e Finish transferring files e Log out of the Technician Interface of the target router e Close the connection between your workstation and the target router Quit Wfterm by choosing Exit from the File menu as shown in Figure B 12 Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program l l AG Modem Phone File Transfers Help Exit AlttF4 Figure B 12 Exiting Quitting the Wfterm Program 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 31 Appendix C Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events T
133. codes for an event type The system displays the events by type The severity codes are f or F for fault i or for informational t or T for trace w or W for warning and d or D for debug Debug events are intended only for Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center personnel lt slot_ID gt is the number of the slot containing a link module The system displays the events associated with the link module lt rate gt enables continuous polling of the system s events log and display of new event messages The p option uses a default rate of 5 seconds You can change this by entering a lt rate gt in seconds The system displays the events that occur between polling intervals lt code_no gt is an event code number or a range of event code numbers The system displays the events associated with the specified event code w enables the log command to provide console output in wide format If you enter The console displays log All fault warning and info events in memory log 3 ftp log All events saved to the ftp og file stored on volume 3 5 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 log d12 12 98 log t09 02 00 log eTFTP log eGAME eTl log ffw log s3 log eTFTP ffw s3 log eTCP eTELNET ffw log p10 log c8 log w Saving the Events Log Managing Event Logs All events logged since December 12 1998 All events logged since 9 02 today If it is earlier than 9 02 the console displays all events logged since 9
134. commit Command in Chapter 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Displaying an Events Log File You can use the log command to display a log file Enter the following to display a log file where lt vo gt identifies the volume and lt og_file gt is the name of the log file log lt vol gt lt log_file gt The system reads the log file which is stored in binary format and forwards an ASCII representation to the console The event format is identical to the format of the current log display You can use the same optional arguments when displaying a log file as you can when displaying or saving the current log Enter the following command to limit the event types to display log lt vol gt lt log_file gt d lt date gt t lt time gt e lt entity gt f lt severity gt s lt slot_ID gt See Logging and Displaying Event Messages on page 5 2 for a description of the optional arguments Examples log 2 10_12 log Displays all events stored in the 10_12 og file in slot 2 log 2 10_12 log eTFTP Displays all events logged by the TFTP driver and stored in the 10_12 log file in slot 2 log 2 10_12 log Displays all trace and fault events logged by the SNMP eSNMP ftf driver and stored in the 10_12 log file in slot 2 log 2 10_12 log s3 Displays all events logged to slot 3 and stored in the 10_12 log file in slot 2 5 12 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Event Logs Clearing Events
135. d The syntax for this option is as follows diags lt on off gt lt slot_id gt 7 26 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Examples diags on lt s ot_id gt The ARN executes all power up diagnostics at subsequent restarts diags off lt s ot_id gt The ARN skips power up diagnostics at subsequent restarts diags The ARN restarts immediately and executes complete diagnostics Turning Off the DIAG Indicator LED The DIAG LED lights during diagnostics and goes out after diagnostics have determined that the processor module and its associated link module are functional If they are not functional the DIAG LED on the front panel and LED 8 on the FRE processor module daughterboard remain on If this occurs make sure the modules are seated properly in the router and issue the diags command again Call your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center if the DIAG LED does not go out If you hot swap a link module the diagnostics do not automatically run and the Fail LED on that module remains on In this case you can enter the following command to switch off the Fail LED diags l lt s ot_number gt Note If you do not specify a slot number the diags command switches off the Fail LED on all slots Displaying the Software Version Enter stamp to display the current software version and the date and time it was created 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 27 Using Technician Interface Software Halting Pack
136. d and default zone for all AppleTalk interfaces continued 8 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Aliases Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system at_cur Displays the current network start network end and default zone for all AppleTalk interfaces at_it Displays the status of all AppleTalk interfaces at_rt Displays the entries in the routing table including the node and network IDs of the next hops in the network the number of hops and the status of the network at_zones Lists the zones in the router s zone table at_arp Lists the AARP entries in the router s address mapping table bgpenabled Displays the state of all configured BGP connections Valid values are 1 Enabled 2 Disabled bgppeers Displays the BGP IDs for the connections that are established of all BGP peers bgppeerstate Displays the administrative state of all configured BGP connections Valid values are 1 Up 2 Down 3 Init 4 Invalid 5 NotPresent bgpconnsitate Displays the BGP FSM state of all configured BGP connections Valid values are 1 Idle 2 Connect 3 Active 4 OpenSent 5 OpenConfirm 6 Established bgp3origin Displays the ORIGIN attribute of each network advertisement received via BGP 3 Valid values are 1 IGP 2 EGP 3 Incomplete bgp3aspath Displays the AS_PATH attribute of each network advertisement received via BG
137. d by Security Dynamics Inc Security Dynamics programs each card with a personal identification number PIN to uniquely identify its prospective owner and then assigns the card for exclusive use by that person only If you do not have an assigned PIN the SecurID client on the router also prompts you through a routine for PIN assignment The SecurID administrator can enable you either to select your own PIN or to accept a system generated PIN The SecurID card uses an internal algorithm to electronically generate temporary cardcodes To access the Technician Interface you enter your PIN followed by the current cardcode from your SecurID card The SecurID server on your network either e Recognizes your PASSCODE and grants access to the router s Technician Interface e Does not recognize your PASSCODE and denies access to the router s Technician Interface Note If the SecurID system denies you access to a router after four login attempts the system then removes your PIN from the current list of valid SecurID users To reactivate your SecurID PIN you must request reactivation from the SecurID administrator of your network 308657 14 00 Rev 00 1 5 Using Technician Interface Software Newly installed routers initially do not require SecurID authentication for Technician Interface login privileges The network administrator must first enable the feature on the router We recommend SecurID authentication for ro
138. d with your Site Manager PC software for Windows 3 1 Nearly identical in purpose to the tip Terminal Interface Program command on a UNIX workstation Wfterm enables you to e Dial in to the Technician Interface port of a router e Log in to the Technician Interface for that router start a Technician Interface session e Initiate Technician Interface commands For out of band file transfers to and from a router you run the xmodem commands described in the section About xmodem e Close the connection between the workstation and the router Before you use Wfterm and enter any xmodem command you must e Open Wfterm from its icon in the Site Manager program group e Enter Wfterm setup information local modem settings and the phone number of a target router 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 17 Using Technician Interface Software Opening Wfterm You can open Wfterm by double clicking on its icon in the Site Manager icon group as shown in Figure B 2 Figure B 2 Wfterm Icon Wfterm opens the window shown in Figure B 3 Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program File Modem Phone File Transfers Help Figure B 3 The Wfterm Base Program Window B 18 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files From this window you can e Check current settings or enter new settings for the interface to the modem locally attached to your workstation e Initialize the locally attached modem w
139. e Chapter 8 of this guide and the Writing Technician Interface Scripts guide for information about aliases and script files To edit automgr bat or autouser bat on your workstation use vi or another text editor Then transfer the files via TFTP or XMODEM to the router where the scripts are located For instructions on using TFTP on a nonvolatile file system see Chapter 4 For instructions on using XMODEM see Appendix B 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 21 Chapter 3 Using Operating Commands The basic Technician Interface operating commands allow you to e Display online help e Pause and scroll text on a screen e Terminate a command e Repeat the command last entered e Repeat a command recently entered e Load a command into memory e Ping a remote IP IPX OSI VINES AppleTalk or APPN address e Display the ATM ARP table for a specific IP interface address Overview Technician Interface commands passwords and file names are case sensitive You must press the Return key to issue a Technician Interface command If you issue a command using an incorrect syntax the Technician Interface displays the term usage and the correct syntax to help you See the Preface of this manual for conventions used in this documentation and the Technician Interface online Help for information about Technician Interface commands 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 1 Using Technician Interface Software Displaying Online Help Use the help command to d
140. e Console Port Force User Logout wfSerialPortUserA bortLogoutDisable 31 2 Disable 1 Enable 2 Disable Specifies whether or not the user can execute a Control c C to break out of a user autoscript at login when a user autoscript is in effect Set the parameter to Enable to prevent the user from using C to break out of the user autoscript at login Set the parameter to Disable to allow the user to execute C to break out of the user autoscript at login Use the default Disable if you want users to access the Technician Interface Set to Enable if you want to force users to enter the Telnet logout command set wfSerialPortEntry 31 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 31 History Depth wfSerialPortHistoryDepth 32 20 1 to 40 commands Specifies the maximum number of Technician Interface commands stored in the local command history table The table stores each command you enter at the Technician Interface prompt on a first in first out FIFO basis Set the maximum number of commands that you want the router to remember for subsequent recall via the Technician Interface history command set wfSerialPortHistoryDepth 32 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 32 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attr
141. e gt is the name of the file used to store the output 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 53 Using Technician Interface Software You can suspend recording temporarily by using the pause option You can determine the state of recording by testing the global variable RECORD_STATE from a script ON indicates the system is recording OFF indicates recording is turned off and PAUSED indicates that recording is temporarily suspended To display the pause state of the record command enter the following record pause To change the pause state enter record pause on off on disables recording off reenables recording To close the record file and save it enter the following command record close Note When you specify a record file on a flash NVFS volume remember that only one record file at a time can be open on that volume If you attempt to concurrently write other Technician Interface commands to another open record file on the same volume those commands will fail 7 54 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Enabling Internal Clocking Mode Within test environments and when using the HSSI crossover cable Order No 7832 you may need to configure Nortel Networks routers from the Technician Interface to enable internal clocking mode Enter the following at the Technician Interface prompt set wfHssiEnitry wfHssilnternalClkTestMode 4 1 1 commit The default value 2 enables external clocking The new value 1
142. e lowest weight 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 79 Using Technician Interface Software Example ip6 routes Enter the following command to display all IPv6 routes on the device ip6 routes Next Hop Prefix Protocol Intf Weight 20 0 0 0 128 SYSTEM Discard 0x0 0 0 0 1 128 SYSTEM For Me 0x681a0001 3FFE 1300 0002 0020 0000 64 DIRECT 4 gal 3FFE 1300 0002 0020 0000 128 INTERFACE 4 0x0 3FFE 1300 0002 0020 0200 A2FF FE01 BBC1 128 INTERFACE 4 0x0 3FFE 1300 0002 0021 0000 64 RIPv6 3 0x739c0002 3FFE 1300 0002 0022 0000 64 DIRECT 3 Qx I 3FFE 1300 0002 0022 0000 128 INTERFACE 3 0x0 3FFE 1300 0002 0022 0000 0003 A240 0CAF 128 INTERFACE 3 0x0 3FFE 1300 0002 0023 0000 64 DIRECT 3 gaT 3FFE 1300 0002 0023 0000 128 INTERFACE 1 0x0 Example ip6 routes lt address gt Enter the following command to display the IP version 6 route used when forwarding packets to a specific IPv6 address ip6 routes 3FFE 1300 0100 0007 0200 A2FF FECD 4787 Next Hop Prefix Protocol Intf Weight 3FFE 1300 0100 0007 0000 64 RIPv6 5 0x739c0003 Total routes 1 7 80 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Example ip6 routes lt address gt lt prefix gt System Administration Enter the following command to display the range of IPv6 addresses for the address prefix 3FFE 1300 0100 0 with a prefix length of 48 bits ip6 routes 3FFE 1300 0100 0 48 Protocol Prefix 3FFE 1300 0100 0001 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 0002 0000 64 3FFE 1300 0100 0003 0000 64 3F
143. e status of the console port set wfSerialPortEntry 2 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 5 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Port State wfSerialPortState 3 4 Not present 1 Up 2 Down 3 Init 4 Not present Up enabled Down disabled Init initializing for new instances Not present the port does not physically exist Shows the current state of the port You cannot change this parameter get wfSerialPortEntry 3 lt port_no gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 3 Port Number wfSerialPortNumber 4 None 1 21314 The port number for the information being displayed Not all routers have four physical ports The system places a configured port that doesn t exist into the Not present state You cannot change this parameter get wfSerialPortEntry 4 lt port_no gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 4 2 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Configuring the Console Port Port N
144. e that invokes the listed commands e Enables the translating bridge and the spanning tree bridge e Notifies all relevant software modules of set changes to the MIB Creates an alias named gbridge that gets the translating bridge and spanning tree bridge Enable values Creates an alias named sbridge that invokes the aliases ebridge and gbridge You can insert one or more parameters in an lt alias_value gt when creating an alias You can insert a parameter in an lt alias_value gt in one of two ways Parameter concatenation You can insert a dollar sign in the last character position of the lt alias_value gt Then when a user enters the alias name and follows it with the value of the parameter the system executes the alias with the value the user entered e Parameter reference You can embed one or more parameters anywhere inside the lt alias_value gt For each parameter you embed when creating the alias you insert a percent sign and a parameter number The parameter 1 in an lt alias_value gt takes the value of the first parameter the user enters at the command line after the alias name the parameter 2 in an lt alias_value gt takes the value of the second parameter the user enters and so on Note You cannot combine the two methods of inserting parameters within an alias 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 3 Using Technician Interface Software The parameter number indicates the position of the value i
145. echnician Interface to monitor and configure certain basic functionality in a Nortel Networks router See Using Technician Interface Scripts and Writing Technician Interface Scripts for more information about performing these tasks This chapter describes e Differences between the Technician Interface and Site Manager e How to log in and out of the Technician Interface e Technician Interface scripts brief overview 308657 14 00 Rev 00 1 1 Using Technician Interface Software Differences from Site Manager The Technician Interface running on the router and the Site Manager application running on a PC or UNIX workstation both manage the router software The Technician Interface differs from Site Manager as follows The Technician Interface resides in the router s operating system kernel and automatically loads when you boot the router You do not need to install the Technician Interface software from a separate medium first all you need is an ASCII terminal or Telnet connection to the router Site Manager however resides on a workstation and runs independently of the router software You establish a Technician Interface session through the router s console port using a local ASCII terminal or dial up connection You establish a Site Manager session independently and establish an in band connection over the network The Technician Interface scripts let you display information about various protocols and network services and
146. ecify includes the values for the lower and upper bound parameters For example if you specify a lower bound of 1 and an upper bound of 4 Syslog forwards all event messages logged on slots 1 to 4 Syslog ignores all other event messages To filter events for a specific slot set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd to the desired slot number Set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd to the same number For example to forward only event messages logged on slot 2 set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd and wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd to 2 If you do not want to filter messages by slot number s accept the lower and upper bound default values of 0 set wiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 14 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 11 C 42 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Fault Map wfSyslogEntFltrFaultMap 12 3 CRIT 1 EMERG 2 ALERT 3 CRIT 4 ERR 5 WARNING 6 NOTICE 7 INFO 8 DEBUG Maps router event messages with a severity level of fault to a UNIX system error level that Syslogd recognizes Table C 1 describes each of these error levels We recommend accepting the default UNIX system error level for this severity level To map this severity level to a d
147. ed on the router Syslog forwards messages to n hosts only where n the value of wfSyslogMaxHosts Disabling or Reenabling Syslog Hosts or Filters You can disable or reenable host or filter entries already defined in your Syslog configuration as follows 1 Disable or reenable message forwarding to a Syslog host as follows e Disable a Syslog host anytime after adding it to the router configuration by entering the following command line set wfSyslogHostEntry wfSyslogHostDisable lt wfSyslogHostDest gt 2 commit Disabling a host e Transitions the operational state of that Syslog host entry and its corresponding filters to INACTIVE e Stops Syslog from forwarding event messages to the host e Reenable message forwarding to a specific Syslog host by entering the following command line set wfiSyslogHostEntry wfSyslogHostDisable lt wfSysiogHostDest gt 1 commit Reenabling a host e Transitions the operational state of that Syslog host entry and its corresponding filters to ACTIVE e Allows Syslog to resume forwarding event messages to the host 2 Disable or reenable an entity filter for a specific Syslog host as follows e Disable an entity filter anytime after adding it to the router configuration by entering the following command line C 22 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events set wfiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrDisable lt wfSyslogEntFitrHostindex gt lt wfSyslo
148. edebndrmadscuieebie vente a B 22 Logging In to the Routers Technician Interface ccccsccccceeesseceeeeeseeeeeeneneenees B 24 File Transfer Functions PE AE E PT EAEE TA PEE B 24 Transferring Files from a Router to a PC Workstation E E EE E becatatatetasiacane B 25 Transferring Files from a PC Workstation to a Router 0 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 28 Closing the Connection PT prena orehi donan AT T E B 30 dutana WE seansni A EEA B 31 Appendix C Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Be a E E E Tien ct erecta rene eT C 1 Remote Hosis and FUG EG rrinin naa A C 4 Pono Ute oss raterarnadanndaaereinl einem C 5 Identifying Entity Filters eating EE R ian AT T ran A 0 5 Filtering Dy Event NUMDOV sciinda aAa C 6 Filtering by Event Severity Level ccccccecseccsceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaesecaeseasessaeeneseaees C 7 Filtering by Slot Number 2 mens PE EE eee Wnai ar 308657 14 00 Rev 00 xi Mapping Router Event Messages into Syslog Message Format s C 8 IP Header E E R A T TOT T sis PT ea C 9 UDP Peger sirosuiriee aie E aA C 9 UOP DAE ngonian a anti Gauinue sudsmiLeReeeNiuniboniemiien iain C 9 Priority COJE scccnscimiceutaanoseepeaes aimee ieee AE T peepee eee 0 9 Time Sequencing Syslog Viisin IAEE A E AE A TA E a IN Syslog Message Handling on a Workstation 0 cccccscceeeessseceeeessnteeeeeessneeeeenees C 11 Confiauring Syslog on a
149. ee 3 3 Repeating a Command Recently Entered cc ccesceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeneaes 3 4 Loading a Command Tio AVOID insides cassis vara sencdosnniesceaatadasvaaai aain 3 6 Using he Prg Command ssssriisipiisi renner n fete iy meetin are ter re erene reer rs 3 7 II PNM EE dla sees pasa havea cheb oa aera adage la ata ena ppb RRR 3 7 IPVO FING acana tae een E E T 3 11 IPX PUG eironi E O secenimngscdedanerbececanieecaetonnees 3 14 ER A st A E A dora esses EA E E TA 3 17 VINES Ping Reret boai AT E ere Gonan EA T T aE 3 20 POETE P a a tree 3 23 fica id E a A a rere re npr er rt tT 3 26 Displaying the ATM ARP Table for an Interface 2 ccecceecccceeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeee 3 29 Chapter 4 Managing a Nonvolatile File System OVErVICW assesses Mesias rae seine itemise oeta niaaa obeis PT aboe PT eee 4 2 Wera Mulige TORT VN Carde siiani a NAAN 4 3 Naming Files Rules and Conventions oousiscsrsnirerin aiiin aaa aiaia 4 5 Displaying the Stalis of All Memory Cards icc tccciccescssetesacntcdonwacsecetduccamietatedandepaasiobanee 4 6 NS SCI a lame aun ans re eeAkeNS 4 7 Changing the Active Volume Gettin otis ehtona aes ai aboa raai 4 11 GOONG A PUE eeir E a a aE cae ds aaa 4 11 TP a A aatiotantst ata ieee 4 12 In Band File Transfers rrr re R rere err er PEAT n T TEON 4 13 QuioBand Mile WanStere soraan a a vi 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Displaying ihe Gontenis of a PIG ee
150. eevaeks eeceatanetemeiaress memieeiete 1 4 Technician Interface Welcome Screen cceccceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeaaeeees 1 10 L gin Timegut SUIS as sisessviocasessnsroissiascanasaseianndanntacdintiene aa ne AS aa 1 11 Login Configuration rere aa N aN eee A SOUS SIE zinin saa pene aa dae pepe etna aetna a hice uate eeae 1 12 Starting a Manager Session from Within a User Session cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 13 Using Technician menace Sa NUS asec sroca ros cvascnezascscennesciinameencad tontedacaueuNeesanedauedasuonners 1 13 Chapter 2 Configuring the Console Port COE MIONE onient E SAT T Soetarno aia PT oat ee rer TT 2 2 Cordiguring Console Part Parameters sensido 2 2 Usiagthe NST CANIS sereisas aiai 2 2 Using the ser IAIN serioak ar Er EaR 2 3 Usma the commit command mesnin e aa AAE 2 4 Using the save Command ecccceeteeeeeseeeeeeeetetaeeeeenees Beis siete ert re 2 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 V Console Port PANT I passum RN E 2 4 Using Autoscript Files Sode T a P aoas T PAT tino 2 19 Sample BUTS S EHO PINGS ceire aa ai Ea aE S iS as 2 20 Customizing Autoseiipt FIGS srine adoiira ania 2 21 Chapter 3 Using Operating Commands CEP A N A EAE T E AE A AT AT A E 3 1 Displaying Online Help itis cheba ui E T rn aan An PAT R Pausing and Scrolling the SereE M sirce r annir aa iA 3 2 PaRa E OE aa a a onemat anna 3 3 Repeating the Command Last Entered PEE AE E E E E r
151. el Networks is not liable to Licensee for damages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and Re export Licensee agrees not to export directly or indirectly the Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government i export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide the Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Nortel Networks 4401 Great America Pa
152. elete wfSyslogEntFltrDelete 1 1 Create 1 Create 2 Delete Creates or deletes an entity filter for the remote host at the location defined by wfSyslogEntFltrHostIndex for this filter table entry Set to 1 to create an entity filter for the remote host at the IP address defined by wfSyslogEntFltrHostIndex for this filter table entry Set to 2 to delete this entity filter set wiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrDelete lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 2 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 1 Entity Filter Enable wfSyslogEntFltrDisable 2 1 Enable 1 Enable 2 Disable Enables or disables the entity filter associated with this filter table entry Set to 1 to enable the entity filter associated with this filter table entry Set to 2 to disable the entity filter associated with this filter table entry set wiSyslogHostEntry wfSyslogEntFlitrDisable lt host_ P_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 2 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 2 C 36 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Filter Operational State wfSyslogEntFltrOperState 6 2 inactive filter 1 active filter 2 inactive filter Indicates the actual status of the filter When the status is ACTIVE Syslog filters against the criteria
153. em The cold start consists of CPU backbone and link diagnostics and a reboot If you do not enter a slot number the system tests and reboots all slots How the Router Boots This section describes how each processor module in the router obtains its router software image and configuration when you do not override the default router software image for example bn exe and configuration file config You do not override these files when you Cycle the power on the router Issue the diags command Hot swap a module Issue the reset command Issue the boot command without specifying defaults A cold start occurs when you cycle the power on the router or issue the Technician Interface diags command The processor module executes CPU and backbone diagnostics and if a link module is present link diagnostics When CPU and backbone diagnostics terminate successfully and link diagnostics terminate successfully or unsuccessfully the processor module boots 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 9 Using Technician Interface Software Booting A warm start occurs when you hot swap a module press the Reset button or issue the boot or reset command The processor module boots without running diagnostics When you hot swap a module the DIAG LED on the front panel and LED 8 on the FRE module daughterboard behind the RFI shield remain on indicating that diagnostics have not been run We recommend that you issue the diags command when you hot swap
154. enable or disable protocols circuits lines and services The Technician Interface is a command line interface it assumes that you are a network manager who knows the Technician Interface command syntax the MIB and SNMP The Technician Interface does provide online Help however In contrast Site Manager is menu driven when you display screens and select options from Site Manager menus it automatically sends the appropriate SNMP commands to the router Site Manager also provides help text Caution The Technician Interface does not provide the consistency checking or verification that the Site Manager static configuration feature provides Technician Interface users can set erroneous values commit the values to memory and save the values to configuration files thereby possibly disrupting router functionality and network activity 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Introducing the Technician Interface Running the Technician Interface The Technician Interface software entity normally runs on one slot only except as noted otherwise in the following table Router Model Slot AN ANH ARN Slot 1 only ASN Slots 1 to 4 individually or simultaneously depending on the number of ASN routers stacked and the setup of the back panel for each router BN BLN BLN 2 BCN Slot 2 If you reset the slot on which the Technician Interface is running the Technician Interface resets to another avail
155. enables internal clocking Enter the following to display the new value get wfHssiEntry wfHssilnternalClkTestMode 4 1 The Technician Interface displays wfHssiEntry wfHssiInternalClkTestMode 4 1 1 Be sure to enter the following to set the variable back to external clocking to use the external clock source set wfHssiEniry wfHssilnternalClkTestMode 4 1 2 commit Responding to QENET Underflow Errors Transmit underflow errors can occur when a QENET link module is connected to a FRE module and all four ports are transmitting This often occurs when non SNAP encapsulated frames received from an FDDI ring are routed out the interface of a QENET module An example of such a frame is a Novell proprietary encapsulated frame on FDDI The wfCSMACDUfIoTx attribute in the wf CSMACDEntry MIB object shows the number of transmit underflow errors These errors result in other stations detecting CRC errors Enter the following Technician Interface command for each of the four connectors only if you are experiencing transmit underflow errors as described previously set wfiCSMACDEniry wfCSMACDAlignmentMode lt s ot no gt lt connector gt 1 commit 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 55 Using Technician Interface Software Then save the configuration with these changes to the configuration file When you set the wfCSMACDAlignmentMode attribute to 1 ALIGN_ALL the router realigns the nonoptimally aligned frames before transmitting them When
156. enabling Syslog on the Router e Disable or reenable a Syslog host or filter on the router See Disabling or Reenabling Syslog Hosts or Filters on page C 22 e Delete remote hosts or entity filters from the current Syslog configuration Refer in this section to Deleting Remote Hosts or Entity Filters from the Syslog Configuration e Delete Syslog from the router See Deleting Syslog from the Router on page C 24 Disabling or Reenabling Syslog on the Router You can if necessary disable the Syslog service anytime after enabling it on a router Enter the following command line to disable Syslog set wfiSyslog wfSyslogDisable 0 2 commit Disabling Syslog on the router e Transitions all Syslog hosts and their filters to an INACTIVE operational state in the router configuration e Halts all message forwarding from Syslog to any Syslog hosts configured on the router You can also reenable Syslog after disabling it on a router Enter the following command line to reenable Syslog set wfiSyslog wfSyslogDisable 0 1 commit 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 21 Using Technician Interface Software Reenabling Syslog on the router e Transitions Syslog hosts and their filters to an ACTIVE operational state in the router configuration Only n Syslog host entries transition to the ACTIVE state where n the value of wfSyslogMaxHosts e Resumes all message forwarding from Syslog to Syslog hosts configur
157. enabling a Scheduled Boot Event cccceeseceeeteeeesteeeeeeees 7 19 Modifying Attributes for Scheduled Boot Events 0 0 0 aoa iene 7 19 Deleting Scheduled Boot Even serasi 7 20 Deleting Scheduled Boot Services from the Router ccsceseeeseeeeees 7 20 Restarting BASIE sirere PEAT a nieteeeets T aunt an AA 7 20 Resentmo a Syeeitor SIET rii TE rrer tr eerrrere nr tnrerreer errr rrr 7 21 Runnin Degna ol arene eerste ener ee On cere omen r Ce reunnt nr meaner eT cnenr remerern eter err emery 7 24 Enabling and Disabling Diagnostics During the Power Up Sequence 0 7 26 AN and ANH Power Up Diagnostic Option c cccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneees 7 26 ARN Diagnostics On Off Option fetes Peer rian eenets eta oer 7 26 Tuning Or ihe DIAG Indicator LED sccsctste ccm naan eta 7 27 Displaying the Software Version ccc s dccccstenesnccd seen ceuntonecsenndioacneastaeuersatinbentusarteednrie 7 27 Halting Packet Transfer Between Slots T Di P TEE T E T 7 28 Verifying and Upgrading SoftWare ssis na a E 7 28 Vaan an Executable FIE sssrin nianie Seia EEA ANE iE 7 29 viii 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Upgradingiand Verivind a PROM sess asnsseedienes inaina a Se Upgrading PROMS Reine ly asansor naea 7 33 Determining Current PROM Image Versions ccseceecceeerseeseeeereeneeteeteeeeeteeee 7 33 Determining the Version of the Current Boot PROM Image eeeeeeees
158. epth value Instructions Compression ratios may improve with settings higher than 3 the value inherited from the wfWcpLineSearchDepth attribute however throughput may actually decrease for settings higher than 12 or 13 The compression engine yields higher compression ratios but takes longer to find token matches for the data being sent over the circuit Nortel Networks does not recommend settings higher than 13 Accept the default value to inherit the wfWcpLineSearchDepth value on this circuit or choose a customized value that provides the best trade off between compression ratio and throughput on this circuit Test end to end throughput on this circuit before and after modifying the WOP circuit search depth value Command set wfWepCircuitEntry wfWepCircuitSearchDepth lt 0 255 256 gt MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 22 2 1 7 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 51 Using Technician Interface Software Displaying a Greeting or Notice Before the Login Prompt You can create a greeting notice caution or warning message that appears before the Technician Interface Login prompt To create and initialize this message on the router proceed as follows 1 Create an ASCII file named ti_notice txt on your UNIX workstation or PC 2 Enter the text of a greeting or notice message that meets your requirements Format the message with appropriate spacing and return characters Note The router software imposes no limit on the si
159. epting the default UNIX system error level for this severity level To map this severity level to a different UNIX error level set wfSyslogEntFltrWarningMap to the error level you want set wfSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrWarningMap lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt tla3lalslel7ie gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 4 1 13 Info Map wfSyslogEntFltrInfoMap 14 7 INFO 1 EMERG 2 ALERT 3 CRIT 4 ERR 5 WARNING 6 NOTICE 7 INFO 8 DEBUG Maps router event messages with a severity level of info to a UNIX system error level that Syslogd recognizes Table C 1 describes each of these error levels We recommend accepting the default UNIX system error level for this severity level To map this severity level to a different UNIX error level set wfSyslogEntFltrInfoMap to the error level you want set wfSyslogEntFitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrinfoMap lt host_ P_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1l2l3l4l5lel7l8 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 4 1 14 C 44 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Trace Map wfSyslogEntFltrTraceMap 15 8 DEBUG 1 EMERG 2 ALERT 3 CRIT
160. equent filter assign the next consecutive number Note Although you assign each filter an index number manually through the Technician Interface Site Manager automatically assigns an index number to each new filter you add to the configuration 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 5 Using Technician Interface Software When you want Syslog to select and forward from all entities event messages that satisfy severity and slot criteria that you specify configure a filter for the wildcard entity number 255 Note The wildcard filter is active for a host only if there are no other entity filters active for that host If you configure and activate a filter for any entity number other than 255 that filter takes precedence over the wildcard filter The wildcard filter transitions to the inactive state The setting of the attribute wfSyslogEntFltrOperState indicates the current operational state of any filter instance you configure for a given host If wfSyslogEntFltrOperState 1 the filter is active if wfSyslogEntFltrOperState 2 the filter is inactive Filtering by Event Number Each event message generated by the router software has a unique message number You can use event message numbers to specify an entity filter that selects only the types of messages you want a remote host to receive You define a range of event message numbers for a router software entity by specifying e An upper boundary number MIB object wfSyslogFltrLo
161. er a replacement message up to 256 characters in length Format the message with appropriate spacing and return characters 5 Save your new version of ti_msg txt 6 Use TFTP to copy ti_msg txt back to the router The new version of the file replaces the original version on the router Recording Console Messages to a File Use the record command to record to a file all messages the system sends to the console terminal In this way you can save the output of Technician Interface commands and if necessary forward the results to Nortel Networks customer support personnel Open the record file before recording then close the file when you finish recording You can lose the file if it is not closed before you unmount the file system or reset the router Enter the following command to open the record file and record messages to that file record open fileonly pause lt vol gt lt filename gt open creates and opens a record file The system sends command output and messages to both the console terminal and the file fileonly writes messages only to the file not to the terminal Use this option only within a script This option allows a script to write to a file By default the system writes messages to both the terminal and the file pause immediately places the system in pause mode Use this option with the fileonly option lt vol gt is the slot number containing the volume used to store the file lt filenam
162. er along the path to the target device A sample message follows where 192 32 243 1 is the address of the ICMP host ping ICMP host unreachable from 192 32 243 1 e Atarget address is unreachable message The local Nortel Networks router previously issued an ICMP host unreachable from y y y y message Within 40 seconds the local Nortel Networks router received a subsequent ICMP echo request addressed to the same target device The ARP timed out or the address could not be resolved A sample message follows ping 192 32 1 151 is unreachable Examples ping ip 192 32 1 151 Pings the device at IP address 192 32 1 151 and waits up to 5 seconds default for a response The console displays one of the following messages ping 192 32 1 151 is alive size 16 bytes ping 193 32 1 151 does not respond ping ICMP host unreachable from 192 32 243 1 ping 192 32 1 151 is unreachable ping ip 192 32 13 200 p Displays the intervening hop addresses to the destination and the time it took to reach them before displaying the response message for each ping For example the console displays the following messages 1 1 ping p 192 32 13 200 traceroute to 192 32 13 200 1 30 hops 16 byte packets 1 193 32 44 57 11 ms 7 ms 7 ms 2 193 32 44 12 9ms 8 ms 15 ms 3 193 32 60 41 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 4 192 32 13 200 11ms 11ms 11ms 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 9 Using Technician Interface Software Examples continued ping 192 32 1 151 t3
163. erface Software File Handling The following information applies to configuration files you transfer between a remote workstation and a Nortel Networks router e The YMODEM protocol truncates binary files received in a batch transfer operation The YMODEM header specifies the truncated size e YMODEM sets the file modification timestamp field in the header of all transmitted binary files Note however that the timestamp is subject to a specific time zone reference Error Checking YMODEM performs the following error checks on file transfers between remote workstations and Nortel Networks routers e If YMODEM detects 10 or more errors during the transmission or reception of any one packet it cancels the transfer in progress e If an unexpected error occurs before a file is completely received YMODEM deletes the incomplete file Canceling a File Transfer While waiting for the beginning of a file transfer YMODEM treats two CAN Control x characters received within 3 seconds of each other as a request to cancel the operation CAN characters do not cancel the operation if received while a transfer is in progress unless you specify the n option flag in the Technician Interface xmodem command line Modem Interface Differences If you are not using a Hayes compatible modem locally attached to your workstation you may need to follow interface line control procedures appropriate for that modem Such procedures may be necessary if f
164. ers menu Choosing this option opens the File to Transfer window as shown in Figure B 10 Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program File Modem Phone File Transfers Help File to Transfer File Name Directorie j iwf asn2stf exe ccomm e m conver 2 _win install exe config install ins G lib kds cfg wfscim kermit dll List Files of Type Drive ALL Files i compresset Figure B 10 Wfterm File to Transfer Window 6 Select the drive and directory that should receive the file from the router If you want to rename the file upon receipt at the workstation you can also type a file name into the File Name field 7 Click on OK Clicking on OK notifies the sending Technician Interface to terminate its wait before transmit state and to send the file you specified in the File to Transfer window The file transfer was successful when you see the File Transfer Completed message in the Wfterm startup window You should also see the file name appear in the receiving directory on the workstation If the transfer was unsuccessful you see the message File Transfer Aborted 8 If you are finished transferring files from the router to the Site Manager workstation enter logout at the Technician Interface command line prompt in the Wfterm startup window 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 27 Using Technician Interface Software At the conclusion of file transfer operations y
165. es_nbrs Displays the contents of the VINES Table of Neighbors vines_nets Displays the contents of the VINES Table of Networks vines_nexthops Displays the contents of the VINES Table of Next Hops continued 8 18 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Aliases Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system vines_cctstats lt circuit_no gt vines_client_en Displays VINES statistics for a specified circuit Enables VINES clients 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 19 Appendix A Using the Nortel Networks Router MIB This appendix describes how to use the Nortel Networks router management information base MIB The Nortel Networks router MIB is a proprietary database that contains configuration parameters and statistics You use the Nortel Networks router MIB to obtain and change configuration parameters and statistics through the Technician Interface or through network management software This appendix provides e An overview of the structure of the Nortel Networks router MIB e A description of the Nortel Networks router MIB files e Specifications with which the Nortel Networks router MIB complies e Implementation notes 308657 14 00 Rev 00 A 1 Using Technician Interface Software Overview This section examines the structure of the Nortel Networks router MIB The object tree assigned to the Nortel Networks router MIB is as follows
166. et 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 5 1 1 0 1 set wfiSnmp 1 0 1 Entering set wflpInterfaceEntry 2 192 32 13 99 3 2 Entering one of the following set wfBrTp 2 0 1 set wiBrStp 2 0 1 Entering one of the following set wiBrTp 2 0 2 set wiBrStp 2 0 2 Committing MIB Sets Changes the value of wfSnmp wfSnmpDisable 0O 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 5 1 1 0 to 1 to enable SNMP Changes the value of wflpInterfaceEntry WflpInterfaceEnable 192 3 2 13 99 to 2 which disables IP for the interface whose IP address is 192 32 13 99 and whose circuit is 3 Changes the values wiBrTp wfBrTpBaseEnable 0 and wfBrStp wfBrStpBaseEnable 0 to 1 to enable the translating bridge and spanning tree Disables the translating bridge and spanning tree The commit command causes all previously entered set commands to take effect When you enter commit the system notifies all software services whose configuration parameters have changed See the next section for instructions on copying all MIB values from operating RAM to a configuration file for later retrieval 6 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Accessing the MIB Saving the Configuration You can copy all MIB values from operating RAM to a configuration file for later retrieval You use the save config command to copy the configuration in memory to the default configuration file or to an alternative configuration file Enter the following where lt filename gt is the name of the file you are creating to store
167. et Transfer Between Slots When you reset a slot containing a processor FRE module the router automatically halts packet transfer between the resetting slot and the other slots in the router Packet transfer automatically resumes after the slot is operational again When you hot swap a FRE module the router also automatically halts and then resumes packet transfer Verifying and Upgrading Software The Technician Interface provides the following commands for verifying and upgrading executable software The readexe command calculates file header and image checksums on executable files on the file system verifies that the checksums match those within the files and displays the results and all file header information Use this command to validate executable files before upgrading The prom w command erases the PROM and copies the contents of the PROM update file to the PROM Use this command to update write a PROM with new software The prom v command compares the contents of a PROM file on the file system to the contents of a PROM Use this command to verify that the software installed in the file system matches the software loaded on a PROM The executable software consists of the following binary files The diagnostics image file is named frediag exe To upgrade with a new diagnostics image transfer the new frediag exe file to the file system issue the readexe command to validate it and issue the prom w command to load wri
168. et according to your console requirements set wfSerialPortEntry 8 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 8 2 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Configuring the Console Port Data Bits wfSerialPortDataBits 9 8 718 Specifies the number of bits in each ASCII character received or transmitted by the router Set according to your console requirements set wfSerialPortEntry 9 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 9 Port Parity wfSerialPortParity 10 1 None 1 None 2 Odd 3 Even Enables or disables data error detection for each character transmitted or received Use the 2 Odd or 3 Even setting to enable data error detection Use the 1 None setting to disable data error detection set wfSerialPortEntry 10 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 9 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Stop Bits wfSerialPortStopBits 11 1
169. everity level slot number Event date Event time Event number or number range Applying Write Filters to the Events Log During normal operation the events log captures all event messages generated internally by the router However for troubleshooting purposes only use the log command to e Include specific event messages in the events log e Exclude specific event messages from the events log Specify the log command as follows log i x e lt entity gt f lt severity gt s lt s ot_ID gt i Include the e f and or s options in Table 5 1 x Exclude the e f and or s options in Table 5 1 Note You can add the e f and s options to the log command in any order 308657 14 00 Rev 00 5 3 Using Technician Interface Software Table 5 1 Log Command Options Option Variable Function e lt entity_name gt Specifies the name of the software service for which the router will log write event messages to the local events log or exclude from the events log When you specify an lt entity_name gt you must e Use uppercase letters Enter the lt entity_name gt in quotes when that name contains spaces for example FRAME RELAY The event database for BayRS routers provides a pull down list of router software entity names f lt severity_levels gt Indicates the severity levels of messages that the router will log to the local events log
170. exadecimal notation consists of a 4 byte network address and a 6 byte host address separated by a period for example Ox0000AB 12 0x000000CD 1234 leading zero padding is not required The 0x indicates that the address is in hexadecimal notation 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands An IPX address in decimal notation consists of a 4 byte network address and a 6 byte host address where e Each byte is a number from 0 to 255 e A period separates successive address bytes for example 0 1 23 47 0 0 0 1 2 55 Note If you issue an IPX ping to an entity on a token ring network you must enter the host portion of the IPX address in byte swapped form noncanonical form t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt are optional These parameters are as follows lt timeout gt is the number of seconds for each ping to time out If the system receives a response to a ping after it has timed out the system does not send an alive message to the console The default is 5 lt repeat_count gt is the number of ping messages to send The system does not wait for the timeout before sending the next ping Enter a value from 0 to 10 The default is 1 The console displays one of the following messages when you issue a ping ipx command If you enter a value other than 0 in the lt repeat_count gt argument the system displays one of the following messages for the default ping plus one for each additional ping e Anali
171. f Band Access to Transfer Files File Names The conventions for the treatment of file names by the YMODEM protocol are e The source router or the remote workstation sends files with path names stripped and limited to eight characters plus a three character extension The router or workstation converts all file name characters to lowercase and all 66 99 characters to characters e The target router or workstation stores received files under their transmitted names However YMODEM converts characters in the received file name back to characters YMODEM also translates all uppercase characters into lowercase and eliminates any trailing dots in the file name e Ifyou want to specify multiple file names in a single xmodem command that is a YMODEM batch file transfer operation insert a space after every file name except for the last name you specify in the command line You can also use wildcards in a file name for example bat For More Information The following book provides additional information about xmodem protocols Forsberg Charles Ed XMODEM YMODEM Protocol Reference Implementation Notes This section provides implementation notes on e How xmodem handles files and checks for errors in files e How xmodem responds when you cancel a file transfer operation e How to manage modem hardware incompatibilities e How to view xmodem log events 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 7 Using Technician Int
172. f you enter The local system tftp dark Transfers a copy of the install bat file to volume 2 put install bat dark 2 install bat On the router known as dark Out of Band File Transfers Appendix B in this guide describes how to transfer files out of band via the dial telephone network by means of the xmodem command 308657 14 00 Rev 00 4 15 Using Technician Interface Software Displaying the Contents of a File Use the type command to display the contents of a file Before displaying a file you can enable the more function to display the file one screen at a time Enter the following to display a file type x lt vol gt lt file name gt X is an optional argument to display the file in hexadecimal format This argument allows files containing nonprintable information to be viewed lt vol gt specifies the slot number of the volume containing the file lt file name gt is the name of the file you are displaying The file is displayed in the same format in which it is stored provided that you do not enter the x argument binary for log files and ASCII for alias files Log files are stored in binary format use the log command described in Logging and Displaying Event Messages in Chapter 5 to display a log file in ASCI format Examples type 2 install bat Displays the contents of the install bat file which is stored on the volume in slot 2 type x 3 config Displays the config file which is stored on
173. fSys 12 0 lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 1 12 6 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 7 System Administration You can use the Technician Interface to perform the following system administration tasks Configure the AN ARN or ASN router s boot or configuration sources when booting Configure AN ANH ARN or ASN initial interfaces Boot the router Configure and manage scheduled boot services Restart a slot Reset a slot Run diagnostics Display the version number of the Nortel Networks router software Halt the transfer of packets between slots Verify and upgrade the software Validate an executable file Upgrade and verify a PROM View the address and size of a dynamically loadable application Reset the date and time Assign Technician Interface passwords Enable or disable SecurID authentication Manage Secure Mode Configure search depth for hardware compression 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 1 Using Technician Interface Software Display a greeting or message before the login prompt Customize the Technician Interface Welcome message Record console messages to a file Enable Internal Clocking Mode Respond to QENET underflow errors Monitor IP routes for IP OSPF and BGP A table of all the Technician Interface commands and their associated access levels appears at the end of this chapter Table 7 4 Managing AN ANH ARN and ASN Routers The following sections apply to the AN ANH A
174. fine Set to 2 Disable if you want to disable Syslog services on the router set wfSyslog wfSyslogDisable 0 lt 1 2 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 1 2 C 28 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Syslog Operational State wfSyslogOperState 3 1 active 1 active 2 inactive Indicates the operational state of the Syslog service on the router If the state is active syslog has been enabled and is filtering and forwarding messages to designated hosts If the state is inactive Syslog is not filtering or forwarding messages for any of the following reasons e Syslog has been disabled wfSyslogDisable 2 e No entries exist in the Syslog host table e No entries in the Syslog host table have been enabled e No entries enabled in the Syslog host table have filters that have been enabled Examine the value of this attribute to determine the operational state of Syslog services on the router get wfiSyslog wfSyslogOperSitate 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 1 3 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 29 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions Command MIB Object
175. g For the AN and ANH use com1 or com2 for synchronous media For the ASN use com lt network_module_no gt lt port_no gt IP address settings lt IP_address gt Specifies the IP address of the interface you set with lt interface gt Provide this address in dotted decimal notation lt subnet_mask gt Specifies the IP subnet mask of the interface you selected with the lt interface gt setting Provide this address in dotted decimal notation lt next_hop_address gt Specifies the IP address of the next hop router Provide this address in dotted decimal notation You need to specify this address only if there are intermediate routers between the router and the BootP server 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Configuring an Ethernet Interface for Network Booting To configure an Ethernet interface for network booting of a router use the following command format ifconfig s lt s ot_no gt d lt interface gt lt P_address gt lt subnet_mask gt lt next_hop_address gt Table 7 3 describes the ifconfig command arguments for configuring the router s Ethernet interface Table 7 3 Seitings for the ifconfig Command Ethernet Interface Setting Description Slot setting s lt slot_no gt Specifies the slot containing the interface you want to configure The slot corresponds to the ASN slot ID which can be 1 to 4 If you omit this argument ifconfig uses t
176. g AS Path Search Patterns on page 7 66 S lt source_address gt Retrieves data pertaining only to the advertising ospf_Isdb source you specify after the S flag continued 7 58 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Table 7 7 Flag Descriptions continued S lt s ot_number gt Retrieves data for the slot you specify after the s flag If you also specify an address of 255 255 255 255 for a given slot the command displays only the internal cache for that slot If you do not enter a slot number the command retrieves only data pertaining to the slot where the Technician Interface is running routes bgp_routes cache dvmrp_caches mtm t lt type_number gt Retrieves data for the OSPF LS type type of link state advertisement that you specify after the t flag as follows 0 stub advertisement 1 router links advertisement 2 network links advertisement 3 summary link IP network advertisement 4 summary link ASBR advertisement 5 external link advertisement 6 group membership link advertisement 15 opaque link advertisement 16 resource link advertisement For more information about LS Types see RFC 1583 ospf_Isdb Example ip routes Enter the following command to display the table of IP best used or active routes ip routes Network Mask Proto Age Slot Cost NextHop Address AS 2 0 0 0 8 RIP 30 2 5 92168125733 10 0 0 0 8 RIP 30 2
177. g Command Setting Description Slot setting s lt silot_no gt Specifies the slot containing the interface you want to configure The slot corresponds to the ASN slot ID which can be 1 to 4 If you omit this argument ifconfig uses the current slot Default setting d Resets the router s IP interface settings to the default values This setting tries four WAN configurations in the following order until it finds the correct type for the router s connection to the network 1 Nortel Networks HDLC encapsulation also referred to as Nortel Networks Standard Point to Point with external clocking 2 Frame Relay Annex D 3 Frame Relay LMI 4 Frame Relay Annex A Frame relay settings fr Configures the router s synchronous port as a Frame Relay connection With this setting use one of the following options to specify a DLCMI setting annexd annexa or Imi annexd annexa Imi Specifies the DLCMI setting when one of these options is used with the fr setting Use the same setting as the network to which the router frame relay interface connects The default setting for frame relay is annexd Internal clocking setting int_clk Sets the router s synchronous port to internal clocking at 1 25 MB s If you do not specify the int_clk setting the router defaults to external clocking IP connector setting lt interface gt Specifies the type of IP connector you are configurin
178. g File Space on page 4 18 for instructions We recommend that you first copy the file at the source to a new temporary file name if the name is the same as an existing file name at the destination Enter the following commands to initiate a file transfer from the Technician Interface tftp get lt host_address gt lt remote_vol gt lt remote_file gt lt local_vol gt lt local_file gt tftp put lt host_address gt lt remote_vol gt lt remote_file gt lt local_vol gt lt local_file gt get means you are transferring the file to the local Nortel Networks router and put means you are transferring the file to the remote node lt host_address gt is the address of the host for transfers lt remote_vol gt is the volume number containing the volume to which you want to transfer the file lt remote_file gt is the name to which you want to transfer the file If you do not enter a destination name the system defaults to the lt ocal file gt you specified for the source file lt local_vol gt is the volume number containing the volume in the local Nortel Networks router lt local_file gt is the name of the file used on the local router Caution The local system erases the file if you enter its address in the lt host_address gt field of the tftp command The system executes one TFTP request at a time for the duration of the file transfer The destination system stores the file under the name you specify
179. g Technician Interface Software Setting MIB Values The set command modifies the value of an instance You set an instance by specifying its object attribute instance You may use names or identifiers to specify object groups and attributes use only an appropriate identifier or index value to specify the instance Note When you enter the set command the attribute is set on each running processor module Enter the following to change the value of an object instance set lt object gt lt attribute gt lt instance gt lt value gt or s lt object gt lt attribute gt lt instance gt lt value gt lt object gt is the required name or identifier of the object lt attribute gt is the required name or identifier of the attribute lt instance gt is the required unique identifier of a nontabular object or the INDEX value of a tabular object Note The MIB uses the value of the INDEX in the Entry 1 attribute of a table object to define the lt instance_id gt of any entry belonging to that table The INDEX typically defines the lt instance_id gt by means of one attribute or by means of multiple attributes that together define the lt instance_id gt of a table entry lt value gt is the required new value of an instance of an object This value may be one of the following depending on the data type e Integer unsigned integer types decimal number e IP addresses dotted decimal format for exa
180. gEntFitrNum gt lt wfSyslogEntFitrindex gt 2 commit Disabling a filter Transitions the operational state of that filter wfSyslogEntrFltrOperState to INACTIVE Stops Syslog from forwarding event messages through that filter e Reenable an entity filter by entering the following command line set wfSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrDisable lt wfSyslogEntFitrHostindex gt lt wfSyslogEntFitrNum gt lt wfSyslogEntFitrindex gt 1 commit Reenabling a filter Transitions the operational state of that filter wfSyslogHostOperState to ACTIVE Allows Syslog to resume forwarding event messages through that filter Deleting Remote Hosts or Entity Filters from the Syslog Configuration You can delete a remote host from the Syslog host table or delete a filter from the Syslog filter table as follows 1 To delete a remote host entry from the Syslog host table enter the following command line set wfSyslogHostEntry wfSyslogHostDelete lt wfSysilogHostDest gt 2 commit 2 To delete a filter from the Syslog Entity Filter table enter the following command line set wfSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFlirDelete lt wfSysiogEntFitrHostindex gt lt wfSyslogEntFitrNum gt lt wfSyslogEntFitrindex gt 2 commit 3 Save the changes to your configuration See Task 8 on page C 20 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 23 Using Technician Interface Software Deleting Syslog from the Router If you want to delete Syslog
181. gEvtUppBnd e A lower boundary number MIB object wfSyslogFltrLogEvtLowBnd Syslog considers the upper and lower boundary values as part of the range For example an entity filter for FTP has an event number range with a lower boundary of 5 and an upper boundary of 27 With this filter Syslog forwards to a remote host FTP log messages with event numbers 5 to 27 To specify a filter for an individual message set the upper and lower boundaries of the event number range equal to the same message number If you configure an event number range of 0 to 255 Syslog ignores the range as a filtering parameter and checks instead to see if a message severity mask exists for the same entity filter C 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Filtering by Event Severity Level Each event message generated by the router software has a unique severity level You can use severity levels to filter these messages that is you define a severity mask for the filter Note Syslog checks the message severity mask only when you accept the default event message number range of 0 to 255 for the same filter This causes Syslog to ignore event numbers as criteria for selecting and forwarding messages to a remote host Syslog uses the severity levels as criteria for selecting and forwarding only the types of messages you want a remote host to receive An entity filter passes only messages that have a severity level
182. gins with 192 32 get wflpBaseRtEntry 1 192 32 Note You cannot use more than one wildcard in a get command 6 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Accessing the MIB The following examples demonstrate ways to display the value of an attribute The attribute in these examples is named wfSnmpDisable Its instance ID is 1 object name is wfSnmp and object identifier is 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 5 1 The instance ID of 0 is reserved for base record objects Specifying the base record instance ID in the get command is optional The second example demonstrates how to obtain a group of values associated with an object Examples Entering one of the following get wfSnmp wfSnmpDisable get wfSnmp wfSnmpDisable 0 get 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 5 1 1 get 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 5 1 1 0 get 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 3 5 1 1 get wfSnmp 1 0 get wfSnmp 1 Entering get wfSnmp 0 Entering get wfSnmp Displays the object name the base record ID 0 and the value in the following format wfSnmp wfSnmpDisable 0 1 Appending 0 to the object name and appending the 0 or to the instance identifier is optional when issuing a get command Displays a group of values associated with an object in the following format wfSnmp wfSnmpDisable 0 wfSnmp wfSnmpUseLock 0 1 1 0 wfSnmp wfSnmpLockAddress 0 0 0 0 Displays the following error message get Invalid obj attr inst speci fied 308657 14 00 Rev 00 6 5 Usin
183. gp_routes R lt 555 gt Match a sequence containing only 1 AS 555 ip bgp_routes R 555 Match a set containing only 1 AS 555 continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Table 7 9 Simplified AS Pattern Matching Examples continued Command Operation ip bgp_routes R 555 Match any occurrence of the string 555 in any AS path AS path contains ip bgp_routes R _ 234 333 343_ ip bgp_routes R gt Match any consecutive occurrence of these Autonomous Systems Match any AS path that contains both a SEQUENCE and a SET AS path begins with ip bgp_routes R 666_ Match any AS path that begins with AS 666 ip bgp_routes R 666 AS path ends with Match any AS path that begins with an AS that begins with 666 for example 666 or 6661 ip bgp_routes R _555 Match any AS path that ends in a SET and the last AS in the set is 555 ip bgp_routes R _555 Match any AS path ending in AS 555 ip bgp_routes R _555 Match any AS path in which the last segment is a SET and 555 is the last AS in the SET AS patch contains this pattern OR t hat ip bgp_routes R 555_ 666_ _777 _44 Match the AS path containing AS 555 or AS 44 or match AS paths beginning with 666 or ending with 777 Routing Tables Each slot on the router maintains an independent routing table or routing pool
184. gt Table 7 11 explains the meanings of each ip6 subcommand in more detail Table 7 11 IP Subcommand Meanings Subcommand System Response routes The routing pool you select by specifying the appropriate command option stats Statistics for the interfaces you specify lt options gt lt address gt lt address prefix gt i lt ifindex gt p lt protocol gt n h 1 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 77 Using Technician Interface Software Obtaining IPv6 Route and Node Information The ip6 routes command displays IPv6 routes using the various subcommand options mentioned in Table 7 12 Table 7 12 Options for ip6 routes Command Option Description lt address gt Retrieves IPv6 addresses prefixes that match the address prefix entry lt address prefix length gt Retrieves a range of IPv6 addresses prefixes that match your entry Specify all or part of an IPv6 address and a prefix length from 1 to 128 bits i lt ifindex gt Retrieves all routes that point out the interface index number you specify p lt protocol gt Retrieves data for all routes sourced by the protocol you specify Protocol options are as follows e DIR directly attached networks e ST static network routes e RIP RIPv6 routes ND neighbor discovery routes IDRP IDRP routes e IF local interface routes e SN static adjacent node addresses e DN dynamically learned adjacent node addres
185. hGroup wfFddiGroup 3 wfFddiPortGroup wfFddiGroup 4 wfCSMACDAutoNegGroup wfLine 16 wfPktCaptureGroup wfLine 21 wfCompressionGroup wfLine 22 wfAtmInterfaceGroup wfLine 23 wfAtmCommonGroup wfAtmInterfaceGroup 1 wfAtmLinkModuleGroup wfAtmInterfaceGroup 2 wfAtmCellSwitchGroup wfAtmInterfaceGroup 3 wfSonetGroup wfLine 24 wfDsx3Group wfLine 26 wfBisyncGroup wfLine 27 wfModemGroup wfDsuCsuGroup Figure A 1 Sample Top Level Hierarchy of the Nortel Networks Router MIB continued A 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using the Nortel Networks Router MIB wfApplication wfSwSeries7 5 wfDataLink wfApplication 1 wfBridgeGroup wfDataLink 1 wfBrLearning wfBridgeGroup 1 wfBrSourceRouting wfBridgeGroup 2 wfBrTplnterface wfBridgeGroup 3 wfBrTrafficFilterTable wfBridgeGroup 4 wfBrNativeModeLan wfBridgeGroup 5 wfSpanningTree wfDataLink 2 wflfGroup wfDataLink 3 wfCircuitOptsGroup wfDataLink 4 wfDlsGroup wfDataLink 5 wfLIcGroup wfDataLink 6 wfSdicGroup wfDataLink 7 wfLapbTable wfDataLink 8 wfProtocolPriorityGroup wfDataLink 9 wflRedundGroup wfDataLink 10 wfDecGroup wfApplication 2 wfivRouteGroup wfiInternet wfApplication 3 wfArpGroup wflnternet 1 wflpRouting wflnternet 2 wflpGroup wflpRouting 1 wfRipGroup wflpRouting 2 wfOspfGroup wflpRouting 3 wfEgpGroup wflpRouting 4 wfBgpGroup wflpRouting 5 wfBgpGeneralGroup wfBgpGroup 1 wfBgp3Group wfBgpGroup 2 wfBgp4Group wfBgp
186. he catalog is located on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com catalog html and is divided into sections arranged alphabetically e The CD ROMs section lists available CDs e The Guides Books section lists books on technical topics e The Technical Manuals section lists available printed documentation sets 308657 14 00 Rev 00 XXV Using Technician Interface Software How to Get Help If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers Technical Solutions Center Telephone Number Billerica MA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Santa Clara CA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Valbonne France 33 4 92 96 69 68 Sydney Australia 61 2 9927 8800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 5402 7041 Xxvi 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 1 Introducing the Technician Interface The Technician Interface provides management access to a Nortel Networks router by means of e Telnet in band connection to the router e Direct or dial out of band connection to the router s console port You can use the Technician Interface to install a router and to maintain or diagnose router operation In addition you can use the T
187. he circuit number and the protocol on that circuit An outgoing circuit is represented by the circuit number the protocol on the circuit and the time to live TTL threshold Table 7 10 lists each protocol letter and its meaning Table 7 10 Protocol Letters and Meanings Protocol Letter Meaning D The circuit is receiving or transmitting DVMRP path messages for the flow R The circuit is receiving or transmitting RSVP path messages for the flow M The circuit is receiving or transmitting MOSPF path messages for the flow N The protocol on the circuit does not currently have routing information for the flow If the letter denoting the protocol on the incoming circuit is lowercase the circuit is a drop circuit that is the circuit drops packets for that source group pair The number that follows the protocol letter on an outgoing circuit indicates the associated TTL threshold For MOSPF this threshold may vary per group source or outgoing circuit For DVMRP or RSVP this threshold varies only per outgoing circuit 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 73 Using Technician Interface Software For example the following display shows that on this slot there is a cache entry for lt 192 32 27 112 32 224 2 2 5 2244242405 in 3D 5d 192 3227 112 32 out 10000000 2D1 4M2 The slot is accepting packets on circuit 3 which is running DVMRP for the flow 192 32 27 112 32 224 2 2 5 and dropping packets for the flo
188. he command history table The history list contains up to 20 commands by default You can increase the number of commands in the history list to a maximum of 40 by setting new values for the console serial port attribute wfSerialPortHistoryDepth and the Telnet attribute wfTelnetHistoryDepth Example From a Technician Interface session enter set wfSerialPortEntry wfSerialPortHistoryDepth 40 set wiTelnet wfTelnetHistoryDepth 40 commit By running the history command you can recall and run any one of the last 40 commands you entered at the Technician Interface prompt 3 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Example gt dinfo Command 1 Using Operating Commands SPACE VOL 98 STATE TOTAL SIZE FREE SPACE CONTIG FREE 2 FORMATTED 4194304 745101 697153 4 FORMATTED 4194304 2106021 2106021 gt dir 2 Command 2 Volume in drive 2 is Directory of 2 File Name Size Date Day Time bn exe 3271441 06 14 99 Mon 2 35 07 debug al 12568 06 14 99 Mon 1 38 57 install bat 152524 06 14 99 Mon 23 92 00 ti cfg 128 06 14 99 Mon 2 39 08 config 2044 06 20 99 Sun 2 57 35 syslog cfg 2628 06 20 99 Sun 2 58 09 4194304 bytes Total size 745101 bytes Available free space 697153 bytes Contiguous free space gt stamp Command 3 Image beta 14 00 1 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 5 Using Technician Interface Software Created Tue Sep 813 08 17 EDT
189. he current slot Default setting d IP connector setting Resets the router s IP interface settings to the default values Resetting an Ethernet interface makes it inactive in the network booting process The output of the getcfg command shows the default as None lt interface gt IP address settings Specifies the type of IP connector you are configuring For the AN and ANH use xevrt For the ASN use xevr lt network_module_no gt lt port_no gt lt P_address gt Specifies the IP address of the interface you set with lt interface gt Provide this address in dotted decimal notation lt subnet_mask gt Specifies the IP subnet mask of the interface you selected with the lt interface gt setting Provide this address in dotted decimal notation lt next_hop_address gt Specifies the IP address of the next hop router Provide this address in dotted decimal notation You need to specify this address only if there are intermediate routers between the router and the BootP server 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Enabling and Disabling Interfaces with ifconfig To enable an AN or ANH interface for the network boot process or to disable an interface from the network boot process use the following command formats ifconfig disable lt interface gt ifconfig enable lt interface gt To enable an ASN interface for the network boot process or to d
190. he upper and lower boundary attributes set to 0 the default value for those attributes the filter cannot transition to the active state Mapping Router Event Messages into Syslog Message Format Syslog running on each slot maps filtered event messages into Syslog message format For example the following system log message 1 02 07 95 16 03 18 679 INFO SLOT2 FTP Code 5 FTP is initializing looks as follows in Syslog format lt AE gt FTP SLOT 2 SEVERITY Info ENTITY_CODE EVENT_CODE 88 5 FTP is initializing Figure C 3 shows how Syslog encapsulates a message into a UDP packet UDP data IP header UDP header lt priority code gt Syslog message Entity Description SLOT Slot Number SEVERITY Severity Level ENTITY _CODE EVENT_CODE Entity_code Event_code lt Facility Level gt TS0003B Figure C 3 Syslog Message Encapsulation C 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Syslog retrieves the variables shown in brackets from the router s system log message or from the host table The next sections describe the variables for e IP header e UDP header e UDP data e Priority code IP Header When an event message passes all filtering criteria syslog adds the destination IP address for a specific remote host UDP Header When an event message passes all filtering criteria syslog adds the des
191. his appendix provides e An overview of Syslog services on a Nortel Networks router and counterpart Syslogd services on a UNIX workstation e Procedures for Configuring Syslogd on a UNIX workstation Configuring Syslog services on a router Managing Syslog services on a router e An example Syslog configuration e Descriptions of Syslog MIB attributes parameters To use the information in this appendix you should have experience with UNIX system commands and facilities and also with the Technician Interface for Nortel Networks routers Overview You can use the Syslog messaging feature to manage router event messages on any UNIX based network management platform The Syslog software on the router communicates with a software component named Syslogd on your management workstation 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 1 Using Technician Interface Software Syslogd is a UNIX daemon that receives and locally logs displays prints and or forwards messages that originate from sources internal and external to the workstation For example Syslogd on a UNIX workstation concurrently handles messages received from applications running on the workstation as well as messages received from Nortel Networks routers running in a network accessible to the workstation Figure C 1 illustrates the following Syslog and Syslogd functionality Syslog running on each slot Polls the local events log buffer to retrieve new event messages Selects mess
192. his file A copy of the bootstrap image resident on the bootstrap PROM of an ASN router You cannot read or change this file A copy of the diagnostics image resident on the diagnostics PROM of an AN series router You cannot read or change this file A copy of the diagnostics image resident on the diagnostics PROM of an ARN series router You cannot read or change this file A copy of the diagnostics image resident on an ASN router You cannot read or change this file A copy of the bootstrap image resident on the bootstrap PROM of a System 5000 router You cannot read or change this file A copy of the diagnostics image resident on a System 5000 router You cannot read or change this file The default configuration file The system refers to this binary file for configuration data when booting You can change the configuration by copying an alternative configuration file to config You can also use the boot command to specify a different configuration file This file must have the config file name for the system to configure automatically after booting We recommend that you copy config to a new backup file name before overwriting it An ASCII file containing aliases commands that abbreviate long or multiple commands that you can use to debug common network problems See Debugging with Predefined Aliases in Chapter 8 to use the aliases in this file 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software fred
193. hnician Interface Software Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system Ibstate Displays bridge interfaces and their current states The following example shows one line in the list of interfaces where 1 is the index and 2 is the state wfBrTpInterfaceEntry wfBrTpInterfaceStat e l 2 The states are 1 Up 2 Down 3 Init 4 Not present Ibstats Displays bridge receive transmit and dropped packet statistics mem_info lt s ot_no gt Displays the specified slot s total physical memory and the memory allocation for the local and global memory pools in KB For example if you enter mem_info 2 the system displays information similar to the following Memory information for slot 2 wfKernParamEntry wfKernParamTotMem 2 819 2 wfKernParamEntry wfKernParamLocMem 2 614 4 wfKernParamEntry wfKernParamGlobMem 2 20 48 osiadjs Displays the adj ID osil1lsp Displays the LSP ID for Level 1 osil2isp Displays the LSP ID for Level 2 osiliroutes Displays the path or router ID for Level 1 osil2routes Displays the path or router ID for Level 2 ospf_drs Reports the designated router and backup designated router for each of the router s attached OSPF networks continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Aliases Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system
194. hput for several file transfer operations across the circuits or line for which you are changing the search depth value Select files that contain data representative of the type of information your organization needs to send and receive daily e Measure the percentage of bandwidth use required to send your test files over the synchronous line e Calculate the compression ratios resulting from the file transfer operations Compare your compression ratios and line use figures taken before and after your changes Determine from these results whether you have improved the configuration for data compression on the desired line and or circuits The best settings for the search depth attributes result in the best trade offs between end to end throughput compression ratios and line costs for the type of data you want to send over a synchronous line 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 49 Using Technician Interface Software WCP Search Depth Attributes The modifiable search depth attributes for the WCP entity have the following characteristics Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID WCP Line Search Depth wfWcpLineSearchDepth 9 3 0 no compression on this line to 255 maximum compression on this line Defines the depth of searching for repetitive patterns in the data you want to send over a synchronous line Unless you also configure search depth at the ci
195. iag exe freboot exe install bat inst_arn bat ti cfg A copy of the diagnostics image resident on the diagnostics PROM of a BLN BLN 2 or BCN router You cannot read or change this file A copy of the bootstrap image resident on the bootstrap PROM of a BLN BLN 2 or BCN router You cannot read or change this file A script file that you use during the initial startup of all router platforms except the ARN A script file that you use during the initial startup of the ARN only A configuration file containing the MIB variables associated with the default Technician Interface console operating parameters This file contains the minimal configuration necessary to operate the router This file is stored in binary format The Total size Available free space and Contiguous free space fields that appear below the dir display show the same information as the Total Size Free Space and Contig Free Space in the dinfo display See Displaying the Status of All Memory Cards on page 4 6 for a description of these fields 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System Changing the Active Volume Use the cd command to change the active volume as follows cd lt vol gt lt vol gt is the slot number of the volume The system displays the new active volume If you enter the cd command without specifying a volume the system displays the present working directory as follows cd Present Working Directory 2
196. ibute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Maximum Autosaved Files wfSerialPortAutoSaveNumFiles 33 0 log autosave off 1 to 99 Specifies the number of times the system saves the events log to a new file automatically when the log is full The system saves the log the maximum number of times you specify or until the memory card or diskette drive on the router becomes full Accept the default value 0 disabled or specify the number of times you want to save the log to a new file set wfSerialPortEntry 33 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 33 Autosave Volume wfSerialPortAutoSave Volume 34 None Any valid memory card volume slot number from 1 to 14 or the diskette drive designation a Specifies the target volume where the system stores new log files saved through the log autosave feature Specify the memory card or diskette file system volume on which you want to save the events log through the log autosave feature set wfSerialPortEntry 34 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 34 2 18 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring the Console Port Using Autoscript Files You can configure the Technician Interface to use the autoscript files automgr bat and autouser bat so that the Technician Interface executes certain commands every time you log in as either a Manager or User To configure the Technician In
197. idge interface index you enter You can obtain the lt index gt by using the Ibstate alias stroot Displays the spanning tree designated root node identifier ststate Displays the current state of each link running the spanning tree protocol in the node The states are 1 Disabled 2 Blocking 3 Listening 4 Learning 5 Forwarding 6 Broken todec lt hex_no gt Converts the specified hexadecimal number to decimal A hexadecimal number begins with Ox for example 0x1234 tohex lt decimal_no gt Converts the specified decimal number to hexadecimal trrxo lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of token ring octets received for the specified circuit trrxf lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of token ring frames received for the specified circuit trtxo lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of token ring octets transmitted for the specified circuit trtxf lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of token ring frames transmitted for the specified circuit tr_stats lt circuit_no gt Displays all token ring receive and transmit packet statistics for the specified circuit trs lt circuit_no gt Displays the state of the token ring circuit vines_info lt router_ID gt Displays the information contained in the VINES database record for the specified router vines_ID lt router_ID gt Displays the VINES network number of the router vin
198. ifferent UNIX system error level set wfSyslogEntFltrFaultMap to the error level you want set wfSyslogEntFitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrFaultMap lt host_ P_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 213141516171 8 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 4 1 12 Table C 1 Syslogd Error Levels Error Level Description EMERG A panic condition that syslogd normally broadcasts to all users ALERT A condition that you should correct immediately such as a corrupted system database CRIT Critical conditions such as hard device errors ERR Errors WARNING Warning messages NOTICE Conditions that are not errors but may require special handling INFO Informational messages DEBUG Messages that contain information you can use when debugging or troubleshooting your network 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 43 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Warning Map wfSyslogEntFltrWarningMap 13 5 WARNING 1 EMERG 2 ALERT 3 CRIT 4 ERR 5 WARNING 6 NOTICE 7 INFO 8 DEBUG Maps router event messages with a severity level of warning to a UNIX system error level that Syslogd recognizes Table C 1 describes each of these error levels We recommend acc
199. igure C 1 Syslog and Syslogd Operations 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 3 Using Technician Interface Software Remote Hosts and Filters You use a management workstation to monitor event messages generated by specific software entities on each router in your network To receive event messages from a router at your management workstation you must e Enable Syslog on the router e Define in the Syslog host table any remote hosts you want to receive messages e Configure entity specific message filters for each host You can configure entity filters using the Configuration Manager tool under Site Manager or with set and commit commands you enter at the Technician Interface of the router Note This appendix covers Syslog configuration via Technician Interface commands only For information about how to configure Syslog through Site Manager see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Each entity filter selects only event messages that e Originate from a router software entity that you specify by entity number e Have an event message number or severity level that matches one of the values you configured e Originate from a router slot you specify Figure C 2 illustrates how an entity filter limits the number of event messages forwarded by Syslog from a router to a specific remote host Each filter attribute or parameter that you specify increases the selectivity of a filter 308657 14 00 Rev 00 New unfiltered message
200. iles back to the memory card If responses to the dir or dinfo commands reveal more free space than contiguous free space on a memory card compacting the space on the card increases the contiguous free space Caution Back up the files by copying them to a second memory card before issuing the compact command Enter the following to erase the memory card contents and rewrite its files where lt vol gt is the slot number of the card compact lt vol gt The following message appears Compacting file system on volume lt vol gt This may take several minutes Please wait 100 Complete Compaction completed The space is compacted when the Technician Interface prompt reappears Formatting a Memory Card Use the format command to erase all files on a memory card and format it where lt vol gt is the slot number of the card format lt vol gt Use the format command to format new memory cards if you do not obtain them from Nortel Networks 4 18 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System Enter dinfo to ensure that the file system formatted the card successfully We recommend that you copy them to a second volume before issuing the format command Caution You cannot recover your files after entering the format command Transferring a File to a Full Memory Card If you attempt to transfer a file to a memory card that does not have enough space the name of the file with a leng
201. in the startup window 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 23 Using Technician Interface Software Logging In to the Router s Technician Interface After Wfterm connects to the Technician Interface port of a router log in to the router s Technician Interface as follows 1 Press Return if necessary to invoke the Technician Interface login prompt from the target router Watch for the prompt in the Wfterm base program window The system displays the following prompt Login 2 At the login prompt enter Manager The system displays the following message and prompt Welcome to the lt node_type gt Technician Interface Note Your network administrator may have customized the Welcome message and login prompt for the router on which you are attempting a login procedure After you log in to the router Technician Interface you can transfer files to and from that router File Transfer Functions After you log in to the router s Technician Interface you can access and use the file transfer functions of the Wfterm utility by means of the File Transfers menu Figure B 9 B 24 308657 14 00 Rev 00 File Modem Phone Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files File Transfers ASCII Receive ASCII Send Kermit Receive Kermit Send MODEM Receive MODEM Send XMODEMC Receive gt XMODEMC Send YMODEM Receive PgDn YM
202. in replies 7 44 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration SecurID no longer required on Telnet login You have completed the procedure and you have not changed any configuration information for the SecurID client software on the router Disabling SecurlD Authentication Once the Technician Interface login prompt appears or whatever your network administrator has set up for a prompt proceed as follows to disable SecurID authentication services already enabled and active on the router 1 Run the securelogin configuration utility securelogin 2 Respond to each of the questions that appear in your Telnet or console display Press Return after each entry beginning with Do you wish to secure telnet login yes no yes Entering yes invokes an additional verification Are you sure you want to turn off secure ID yes no yes If you entered yes securelogin replies SecurID no longer required on Telnet login If you entered no securelogin replies Secure login information remains unchanged If you entered no and received the reply Secure login information remains unchanged the SecurID client is still enabled on the router Telnet users continue to encounter the SecurID login procedure before acquiring access to the router s Technician Interface 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 45 Using Technician Interface Software Managing SNMP Secure Mode Nortel Networks implements an optional security mechanis
203. inal or terminal emulator connected directly to the router console port You cannot enable disable SecurID services through a Technician Interface session supported through a Telnet connection to the router To enable or disable SecurID services you answer questions from the securelogin configuration utility running on the router Press Return after each entry If you press Return without entering a response to a question securelogin repeats that question Enabling SecurlD Authentication Once you log in to the Technician Interface and the prompt appears on the console display proceed as follows to enable SecurID authentication services on the router 1 Enter the following at the Technician Interface prompt securelogin 2 Respond to each question that appears on your console display Note The sequence shows responses as bold text within brackets Do you wish telnet login to require SecurID yes no yes What is the IP address of the router being secured a b c d lt IP_Address gt What is the IP address of the SecurID server a b c d lt IP_Address gt What is the TCP port number for SecurID services default 755 lt 7CP_Port_Number gt You have designated lt IP_Decimal_Address gt or lt IP_Hexadecimal_Address gt as your SecurID server 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 43 Using Technician Interface Software If you accepted the default port the following message appears on your co
204. information for the associated slot This includes the serial number and revision level fr_diemi lt line lindex gt Lists all MIB attributes for the DLCMI entry of the specified frame relay interface fr_enable_ad lt ine lindex gt Enables the Annex D Data Link Control Management interface on the specified frame relay interface fr_enable_Imi lt ine lindex gt Enables the LMI Data Link Control Management interface on the specified frame relay interface fr_enable_none lt ine lindex gt Disables all DLCMI functions for the specified frame relay interface fr_info Lists all configured Frame Relay interfaces and their instance IDs line lindex fr_mgttype lt ine lindex gt Displays the management type selected for the specified frame relay interface continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 13 Using Technician Interface Software Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system fr_status lt ine lindex gt Displays the status of the specified frame relay interface fr_vcs Lists all instances configured PVCs in the frame relay virtual circuit table fr_ve lt line llindex dici gt Lists all MIB attributes for the virtual circuit table of the specified frame relay PVC hwmods Displays slots and their associated hardware module IDs hwnode Displays the serial number
205. instance 2 5 diagnostics running 7 24 diags command 7 9 to 7 10 7 24 dial connection to router 1 1 dinfo command 4 6 dir command 4 7 directed boot 7 11 Directed Netboot configuring with bconfig command 7 4 disable command 1 13 disabling a console port 2 5 Syslog hosts or filters C 22 the Syslog entity C 21 display filters events log 5 5 displaying OSI link state database 7 76 DLCMI settings 7 6 DVMRP caches command 7 57 E echo command 8 5 enable command 1 13 enabling internal clock mode 7 55 encryption key setting 7 47 entity filters for Syslog remote hosts C 5 Index 3 events via Events Manager clearing 5 13 displaying filters 5 5 displaying log for 5 2 5 12 filtering log input 5 3 filtering log output 5 5 managing 5 2 to 5 13 saving log for 5 7 events via Syslog C 1 C 8 exec command 3 7 executable files 7 29 F FIFO memory buffer 5 2 files an exe 4 9 anboot exe 4 9 andiag exe 4 9 arn exe 4 9 asn exe 4 9 asndiag exe 4 9 bn exe 4 9 compacting space 4 18 config 4 9 copying 4 11 debug al 4 9 default names of 4 9 deleting 4 16 displaying the contents of 4 16 freboot exe 4 10 install bat 4 10 names 4 5 s5000 exe 4 9 s5000diag exe 4 9 syslog conf C 46 ti cfg 4 10 transferring 4 12 to full memory card 4 19 validating an executable 7 29 filters events log input 5 3 events log input filters displaying 5 5 events
206. ion cache ospf _Isdb lt address prefix gt Retrieves data for IP addresses with an address mask routes bgp_routes that matches your entry Specify an IP address in ospf_Isdb dotted decimal notation Specify the number of bits in the address mask by entering a decimal number 1 to 24 starting with the msb in the prefix portion of your entry a lt area_address gt Retrieves data for the OSPF area you specify after the ospf_Isdb a flag A Retrieves one of the following routes ospf_Isdb The entire table of routes including best routes and routes not used e The entire OSPF LSDB 20 lines max per route advertisement c lt circuit_no gt Retrieves data for the circuit number you specify after cache the c flag See Determining Circuit Numbers on page 7 75 i lt BGP_router_ID gt Retrieves routes to or from a BGP peer that you bgp_routes specify after the i flag M Retrieves only the contents of the multicast cache cache n lt nexthop_address gt Retrieves routes for networks associated with this bgp_routes next hop address N Retrieves the BGP ANNOUNCE table of routes bgp_routes p lt ocal_ peer_adaress gt Retrieves routes announced to a BGP peer you bgp_routes lt remote_peer_address gt specify by its local or remote address R lt simplified_regular_ Retrieves AS paths containing a pattern that matches bgp_routes expression gt one you specify in a lt simplified_regular_expression gt See Specifyin
207. ire system The cold start consists of CPU backbone and link diagnostics and a reboot If you do not enter a slot number the system tests and reboots all slots Enter the following to run diagnostics on the entire system diags The system returns the following message Perform diags on all slots y n If you still want to run diagnostics on all slots enter y yes Entering n no terminates the command Enter the diags command with one of the following parameters to run diagnostics and reboot one or more ILIs diags lt s ot_no gt diags lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt diags lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt Examples diags Runs diagnostics and reboots the entire system diags 1 Runs diagnostics for and reboots slot 1 diags 1 5 Runs diagnostics for and reboots slots 1 2 3 4 and 5 diags 4 6 Runs diagnostics for and reboots slots 4 and 6 The system runs diagnostics on the associated slot or slots loads the router software image loads the configuration and initiates the router software services When you issue the diags or diags lt s ot_no gt command from a local console rather than from a Telnet session the results depend on e The slot number you designate in the command line e The model of Nortel Networks router 7 24 308657 14 00 Rev 00 e The type of router single slot or multislot System Administration Based on these variables the router system or slot performs a restart
208. isable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 1 2 in the Syslog base record to a value of 1 Next configure the Syslog global attributes Task 4 Configuring Syslog Global Attributes Once you create and enable Syslog on the router you can accept the default values for the wfSyslogMaxHosts and wfSyslogPollTimer attributes or you can configure a customized value for either attribute If you want to accept default values for the Syslog global attributes go to Task 5 otherwise perform the following steps 1 Configure the maximum number of active hosts served by Syslog on the router set wfiSyslog wfSyslogMaxHosts 0 lt 1 10 gt commit The default setting for wfSyslogMaxHosts is five hosts You can add to the Syslog Host Table more entries than the configured maximum but Syslog forwards messages only to the first n active hosts where n the current value of wfSyslogMaxHosts 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 15 Using Technician Interface Software 2 Configure the interval in seconds between Syslog polling cycles on the router set wfSyslog wfSyslogPollTimer 0 lt 5 610000 gt commit The default setting for wfSyslogPollTimer is 5 seconds Next add a remote host to the Syslog Host Table Task 5 Adding a Remote Host to the Syslog Host Table You must define any remote hosts that you want to receive Syslog event messages from routers in your network If this is the first host you are adding to the Syslog host table
209. isable an interface from the network boot process use the following command formats ifconfig s lt s ot_no gt disable lt interface gt ifconfig s lt s ot_no gt enable lt interface gt lt slot_no gt Specifies the slot containing the interface you want to enable or disable The slot corresponds to the ASN slot ID which can be 1 to 4 If you omit this argument ifconfig uses the current slot lt interface gt Specifies the type of IP connector you are enabling or disabling For the AN and ANH use com1 or com2 for synchronous media or xevr1 for Ethernet media For the ASN use xevr lt network_module_no gt lt port_no gt or com lt network_module_no gt lt port_no gt 7 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Booting the Router The Technician Interface provides the following commands for booting The boot command warm starts the entire system Pressing the Reset button on the front panel of the router initiates the same procedure You can override the default router software image and configuration by specifying an alternative router software image and an alternative configuration file when entering the boot command The reset command warm starts a single processor module or the entire system with the router software image and configuration currently in use Resetting the entire system is equivalent to booting it The diags command cold starts a single processor module or the entire syst
210. isplay of your Site Manager workstation 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 1 Using Technician Interface Software This section describes e The asynchronous terminal program available on UNIX and remote PC workstations e The Technician Interface xmodem command its parameters and its options e How you use the asynchronous terminal program and xmodem commands together in procedures for transferring files to and from Nortel Networks routers About xmodem Nortel Networks routers support xmodem as a Technician Interface command and a set of protocols for moving files between the Technician Interface console port of a router and a remote workstation The xmodem command is based on the Christensen protocol file transfer utility V3 9 November 1990 You determine the protocol for the task you need to perform by selecting the appropriate syntax parameters and options for each xmodem command You enter xmodem commands directly at the command line prompt of either a UNIX workstation or a PC workstation run DOS utility The procedural information you need to enter and use xmodem commands follows on page B 3 As a Set of protocols xmodem includes the e XMODEM CRC protocol e MODEM 7 batch protocol e XMODEM IK block protocol e YMODEM batch protocol Of the four protocols available through xmodem commands you need to use only the YMODEM batch protocol to transfer Nortel Networks files between a remote workstation and a router For this rea
211. isplay online Help text for any Technician Interface command as follows help lt commanad gt When you enter help followed by a space and the name of a command the console displays a detailed description of the command along with its syntax requirements For example when you enter help date the console displays a detailed description of the date command To display all Technician Interface commands in a brief table enter help help To display all Technician Interface commands and their associated syntax requirements enter help Use this command as an online quick reference card when you know the command s function but don t know the command name or its syntax The screen may scroll automatically see the next section to control scrolling Pausing and Scrolling the Screen Use the more command to view output before it scrolls out of view If the more mode is on the system forwards the number of lines you specify to the screen and displays the following prompt at the bottom of the screen Type lt space gt to page lt return gt advance 1 line Q to quit If the more mode is off the screen automatically scrolls when it fills 3 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands Enter the following command to set or display the more mode more s on off lt _of_lines gt S Prevents the console from displaying output on Enables the more mode off Disables the more mode Examples more Displays more
212. issued a reset command from a Technician Interface session console or Telnet on one slot and the target lt s ot_no gt you specified was A slot other than the slot The same slot on which the on which the session is None session is running running Command gt reset reset lt s ot_no gt reset lt s ot_no gt Router AN Warm boot slot 1 Warm boot slot 1 N A ANH e No diagnostics e No diagnostics ARN e Load new image on slot 1 Load new image on slot 1 single slot e Initialize new image on e Initialize new image on slot 1 slot 1 e Retain log info e Retain log info BLN Warm boot all slots Warm boot the designated Warm boot the designated BLN 2 e No diagnostics slot slot BCN Load new image e No diagnostics e No diagnostics multislot e Initialize new image e Load new image on e Load new image on the e Retain log info on all slots designated slot e Initialize new image on designated slot e Retain log info on designated slot designated slot e Initialize new image on the designated slot e Retain log info on the designated slot Note If you reset the slot in which the Technician Interface is running the Technician Interface resets with the next available slot on a multislot system or with the same slot on a single slot system 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 23 Using Technician Interface Software Running Diagnostics The diags command cold starts one or more specified slots or the ent
213. ith the current settings e Enter a telephone number initiate autodialing and open a connection to a remote target router e Log in to the Technician Interface of the remote router e Transfer files between the router and your workstation You can initiate other Technician Interface commands as well at the Technician Interface prompt inside the Wfterm program window However this section does not provide information on Technician Interface procedures other than those required to support xmodem out of band file transfers e Log off the target router terminate the Technician Interface session e Disconnect terminate the connection between the workstation and the target router If you are opening Wfterm for the first time proceed to the next section Checking and Verifying Current Modem Interface Settings If you are sure that the current interface settings for the modem locally attached to your workstation are already correct and you have determined the types of file transfer operations you need to perform proceed to Initializing the Local Modem on page B 21 Checking and Verifying Current Modem Interface Settings You must ensure that the modem locally attached to your workstation can establish a connection with a modem attached to the Technician Interface port of a remote target router To satisfy this requirement you need to check current settings for the physical layer interface to that modem If the settings y
214. itializes the Technician Interface on Slot 1 of that router and you receive the prompt Tyl The 1 preceding the colon represents Slot 1 where the Technician Interface is running on the router or TN for a Telnet session The 1 following the colon represents Serial Port 1 where you physically connect the console or terminal to the router When you log in to the system subsequently by means of simple login or with user authentication with password and or SecurID the Technician Interface displays a Welcome message and the prompt Your network administrator can change the Technician Interface prompt you receive on a local or remote ASCII console or Telnet connection screen For instructions on how to change this prompt on a local or remote ASCII terminal or console screen see Chapter 2 For instructions on how to change the prompt on a remote Telnet screen see Configuring IP Utilities You enter commands after the colon prompt the dollar sign prompt or whatever prompt your network administrator sets on the router for console or Telnet access to the router You can also customize the Technician Interface Welcome screen with a message appropriate for the requirements of your organization or network site For instructions see Customizing the Technician Interface Welcome Message in Chapter 7 1 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Introducing the Technician Interface Login Timeout Guidelines Keep the f
215. l7 err local7 crit local7 alert local7 emerg or dev console dev console dev console dev console dev console dev console dev console local7 debug local7 info local local7 notice local7 err local7 crit local7 alert local7 emerg dev console Messages dispatched to a file local7 info local7 debug local7 warning Messages dispatched to a host local7 notice Messages dispatched to a printer local7 trace var log syslog file dev log debug_file var log warning_file lt host_name gt lt printer_name gt 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 13 Using Technician Interface Software In this example the path specified next to each local facility indicator in the file shows a unique destination for each severity level of router event message Configuring Syslog on the Router You can use Technician Interface commands to configure Syslog on a router You configure Syslog as a sequence of tasks where some tasks include one or more numbered steps The following is an overview of the tasks required to configure Syslog on a router 1 SOY I aR os oo 9 Using the console attached to the router or using a Telnet connection to the router open a Technician Interface session Define a slot mask a slot map for loading Syslog on the router Create the Syslog entity on the router Configure Syslog global attributes Add a remote host to the Syslog Host Table Add an entity filter to the
216. length 6 The attribute contains the last AS number that formed the aggregate route encoded as 2 octets followed by the IP address of the BGP speaker that formed the aggregate route encoded as 4 octets 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 61 Using Technician Interface Software Network Mask Example bgp routes Enter the following command to display routes announced to the peer with a local address of 3 3 3 1 and a remote address of 3 3 3 2 ip bgp_routes N p3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 Peer Rem Addr NextHop Address Org Loc Pref S2idsids2 Ce ee IGP i As Path SEQ 100 Multi exit disc 1 Aggregator 100 192 32 140 40 3334392 3 3 344 IGP i As Path SEQ 100 Multi exit disc 1 SLOT 5 Total Peers 1 Total Nets 256 256 Routes To 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 IGP 5 EGP 0 INC 251 For ip bgp_routes N the display specifies e Total number of peers e Total number of networks e Total number of routes announced to the first five peers on each slot 7 62 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Example bgp routes System Administration Enter the following command to display routes announced to BGP peers known to the local router ip bgp_routes N Network Mask 9232 L74 92032074 92 32 174 As Path SEQ 2 92 32 174 128 27 As Path SEQ 2 160 27 As Path SEQ 2 192 27 As Path SEQ 2 SLOT 4 Total Peers 1 Total Nets 7 Peer Rem Addr 192 T927 192 192 32nd Bee 32 1 ee LYS Li Tg LI Sg
217. ll serial port parameters lt attribute_name gt Is the MIB attribute name associated with one of the serial port parameters lt attribute_no gt Is the MIB attribute number associated with one of the serial port parameters lt port_no gt Is the number of the serial port you are configuring lt option gt Is the new setting taken from the Options list Example The following commands set the Parity parameter to Odd set wfSerialPortEntry wfSerialPortParity 1 2 or set wfSerialPortEntry 10 1 2 Note You can use s instead of set 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 3 Using Technician Interface Software Using the commit Command Enter the following command after issuing one or more set commands commit The commit command causes the changes you made to the configuration to take effect in active memory but not in flash memory You must use the save command subsequently to save changes to a configuration file config and flash volume on the router The Technician Interface software service resets when you enter the commit command Using the save Command After you set and commit changes to the current configuration running in active memory on the router use the save command to store that configuration to a file on a flash memory volume as follows save config lt vol gt lt filename gt Note You can also use the save command to save the current contents of the router s event log environment variable list o
218. log output 5 5 Syslog C 4 Force User Logout parameter 2 17 Index 4 format command 4 18 frame relay settings 7 6 FRE processor module 4 2 4 4 freboot exe PROM image file 4 10 frediag exe PROM image file 4 10 G get command 6 4 H halting a command 3 3 hardware compression 7 48 hardware configuration for out of band file transfers B 9 HDLC encapsulation 7 6 help command 3 2 displaying online 3 2 history command 3 4 list changing the size of the 3 4 ICMP echo request 3 7 3 11 ifconfig command 7 5 to 7 8 images 4 4 ace out 4 4 afn exe 4 4 an exe 4 4 4 9 anboot exe 4 9 andiag exe 4 9 arn exe 4 4 4 9 asn exe 4 4 asnboot exe 4 9 asndiag exe 4 9 bn exe 4 4 4 9 freboot exe 4 10 frediag exe 4 10 list 4 4 4 9 308657 14 00 Rev 00 s5000 exe 4 4 4 9 s5000boot exe 4 9 s5000diag exe 4 9 in band file transfers NVFS 4 13 to 4 15 initializing the Technician Interface 1 3 install bat file 4 10 interface configuration 7 5 to 7 7 internal clock mode enabling 7 55 IP address settings 7 6 7 7 cache command 7 57 command 7 56 to 7 76 connector setting 7 6 7 7 default setting 7 6 7 7 ping command 3 7 to 3 10 routes command 7 57 IPv6 ping command 3 11 to 3 13 routes command 7 78 stats command 7 82 IPX ping command 3 14 to 3 16 L lines per screen setting 2 11 link state packet LSP 7 76 list command 2 2 6 1 loadmap command 7 38 log automatic
219. lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 1 8 gt The default value of wfSyslogEntFltrDebugMap is 8 mapping router DEBUG level messages to UNIX system level DEBUG messages Task 7 Adding More Hosts or Entity Filters If you have finished adding entity filters for this remote host and you do not want to add another remote host at this time go to Task 8 Otherwise to add more hosts or entity filters to your Syslog configuration To add another entity filter for the same remote host return to Adding an Entity Filter for a Remote Host on page C 17 To add another remote host to receive Syslog messages from the router return to Adding a Remote Host to the Syslog Host Table on page C 16 Task 8 Saving Your Syslog Configuration on the Router Save to a file on an NVFS volume the Syslog additions to your configuration as follows save config lt vol gt lt filename gt C 20 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Task 9 Logging Out of the Technician Interface Enter at the Technician Interface command line interface the following command logout For more information about how to close a Technician Interface session with a Nortel Networks router see Chapter 1 Managing Syslog on a Router Once you finish configuring Syslog on a router you may occasionally need to e Disable or reenable the entire Syslog entity on the router See the next section Disabling or Re
220. lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows AT ping 100 5 does not respond e A lt target_address gt is unreachable message This message appears if the local Nortel Networks router cannot find the specified address in its routing table A sample message follows AT ping 100 5 is Unreachable e A resource error message This message appears if the local Nortel Networks router cannot allocate a buffer for the request because none is available A sample message follows AT ping resource error e An Invalid AppleTalk option message This message appears if you specify an invalid parameter for example p A sample message follows AT ping Invalid AppleTalk option e An Invalid AppleTalk address message This message appears if you specify an invalid address for example 1 2 3 4 A sample message follows AT ping Invalid AppleTalk address e A Specified size too large message This message appears if you specify a lt size gt that is larger than 585 bytes The system uses the maximum of 585 bytes A sample message follows AT ping Specified size too large using maximum of 585 bytes e AMAT service is not running message This message appears if the AppleTalk service is not enabled on the router A sample message follows AT ping AT service is not running 3 24 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Examples ping at 100 5 ping at 100 5 t3 r8 Using Operating Commands Pings the device at the AppleTalk address 100 5
221. lt vol gt lt filename gt lt vol gt is the NVFS flash volume on which you want to store a copy of the current modified configuration file on the router lt filename gt is the name you assign to the configuration file that contains your scheduled boot entries Log out of the Technician Interface session BN 3 logout For more information about how to close a Technician Interface session with a Nortel Networks router see Chapter 1 Managing Scheduled Boot Services This section describes how to Disable or reenable scheduled boot services on the router Disable or reenable a scheduled boot event made for an earlier time on the router Change the name of the router software image and or configuration file you want the router to boot with at a later time Delete entries from the RUIBOOT table of scheduled boot events Delete scheduled boot services from the router 7 18 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Disabling or Reenabling Scheduled Boot Services on a Router You can if necessary disable the scheduled boot service anytime after enabling it on a router Enter the following command BN 3 set wfRuiBoot wfRuiBootBaseDisable 0 2 commit Enter the following command to reenable the scheduled boot service after disabling it on a router BN 3 set wfRuiBoot wfRuiBootDisable 0 1 commit Disabling or Reenabling a Scheduled Boot Event To disable a scheduled boot event anytime after adding it to
222. lume For example if you enter tftp put 192 xx x xx 2 config where 192 xx x xXx is a valid IP address the file config will be called config on the router at the specified IP address and will go to the volume specified in wfTftp 2 0 The same will happen if you enter tftp put 192 xx x xx 2 config new_config except that the file will be called new_config However if you enter tftp put 192 xx x xx 2 config 3 test_config the file config will now be called test_config and reside on volume 3 overriding whatever is in wfTftp 2 0 The wfTftp 2 0 attribute is set during the Quick Start procedure using the debug al alias setvol lt slot no gt to target an NVFS volume Caution The destination system in a file transfer automatically overwrites any file already on its volume that has the same file name If enough space does not exist on the file system for the new file and the new file has the same name as an old file the old file will be destroyed and the new file will be corrupted This occurs because TFTP copies the new file over the old and runs out of space before completing the copy Be sure to follow the instructions in this section to avoid corrupting the config file 308657 14 00 Rev 00 4 13 Using Technician Interface Software If the destination system has a memory card to which you are transferring a file we recommend that you compact the card first to optimize the space available for the file See Compactin
223. m Enable is set to 1 Enable The Technician Interface returns to the Login prompt when the timeout value is exceeded Accept the default value 1 minute or specify a different timeout value set wfSerialPortEntry 17 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 17 Command Timeout wfSerialPortCommandTimeOut 18 15 min 1 to 99 min 99 indicates infinity Specifies the number of minutes that can elapse before the Technician Interface disconnects the Telnet session if you do not enter a command at the command prompt This parameter is valid only when Modem Enable is set to 1 Enable Accept the default value 15 minutes or specify a different timeout value set wfSerialPortEntry 18 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 18 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 13 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Login Retries wfSerialPortLoginRetries 19 3 login attempts 1 to 99 99 indicates infinity Specifies the maximum number of login attempts you can make before the Technician Interface disconnects the Telnet session This parameter is valid only when Modem Enable is set to 1 Enable Accept the default value 3 or specify a different value set wfSerialP
224. m for all SNMP set requests This proprietary mechanism is an interim solution to solve some SNMP security problems until a stable widely accepted industry standard security solution is available Our security system uses counters to synchronize management operations between manager and agent In secure mode when Site Manager sends a set request to the router the request includes the encrypted value of a counter plus 1 as the first variable binding in the PDU When the agent on the router receives the set request it compares the decrypted value with the value of its own counter plus 1 If the two values match the agent considers the set request to be authentic and increments the counter by 2 The agent stores the new value of the counter in an encrypted form in the MIB and sends it back to Site Manager as the first variable binding in the response The manager receiving the response validates that the received counter matches the manager s counter plus 2 If the two values match the response is declared authentic The use of counters guards against masquerade security violations because an intruder would have to know the encryption key and the correct counter to send as the first variable binding The security mechanism also guards against message stream modification an intruder cannot reorder a sequence of set requests because the requests counters would not match the next sequence expected by the agent The following sections desc
225. map command with one or more of the following optional parameters to view the addresses and sizes of the applications located on a specified slot or slots The lt s ot_no gt variable is the number of the slot where the applications are located you can also enter the keyword all to view the applications for all slots The lt filename gt variable is the name of the file to which you want to direct the output loadmap lt s ot_no gt lt filename gt loadmap lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt lt filename gt loadmap lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt lt filename gt If you enter the loadmap command without entering a slot number the system dumps the addresses and sizes of all applications on all slots to the specified file name If you do not specify a destination file name the system displays the addresses and sizes of the applications on the screen Examples loadmap Displays the load addresses and sizes for all applications on all slots on the screen loadmap 3 45 Displays the load addresses and sizes for all applications on slots 3 4 and 5 on the screen loadmap 3 8 Displays the load addresses and sizes for all applications on slots 3 4 5 6 7 and 8 on the screen loadmap all 2 map dump Dumps the load addresses and sizes for all or applications on all slots to the specified file loadmap 2 map dump The following example shows a sample screen display when you issue the loadmap command without any optional pa
226. mmand line prompt to the UNIX workstation command line prompt The workstation responds Local command B 14 308657 14 00 Rev 00 10 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files Enter an xmodem send binary command with the print display transfer events and information option flag p set in the command line as follows xmodem sbyp lt source_vol dir gt lt filename gt lt filename gt sb is a send binary file y is the YMODEM file transfer option p prints displays important information and events pertaining to the file transfer s you are about to initiate lt source_vol dir gt is the disk drive volume and directory that contain the files you want to send to the router lt filename gt lt filename gt are the names of the files you want to send from the workstation to the router If you want to enter multiple file names as part of a YMODEM batch file transfer operation insert a space between file names For more information about Technician Interface file name specifications see Chapter 4 Pressing return to execute the xmodem command triggers the necessary handshakes between the YMODEM protocol program running on the workstation and the YMODEM program running on the router This handshaking in turn triggers the start of the file transfers you specified in the xmodem command entered at the UNIX command line prompt 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software 11 12 Typical wo
227. mple 192 32 0 0 e Octet strings hexadecimal numbers starting with Ox e Display strings strings enclosed in double quotes 6 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Accessing the MIB See the Nortel Networks MIB to determine the data type Caution If you are running spanning tree always follow any Technician Interface set command to the bridge with the corresponding Technician Interface set command to the spanning tree Otherwise you may lose connectivity to LANs See the last two examples in this section Also make sure that the values you set are legal Illegal or incompatible MIB values can disrupt software or network services after you enter the commit command See the Nortel Networks MIB for the legal values You can use the list command or see the Nortel Networks MIB to determine the symbolic names and identifiers for object groups and attributes Use the commit command described in the next section Committing MIB Sets to notify the software services of the MIB changes accomplished with the set command Then to copy the changes you make to a configuration file use the save command described in Saving the Configuration on page 6 9 Note Be sure to enter commit after entering the set command see the next section Committing MIB Sets for instructions 308657 14 00 Rev 00 6 7 Using Technician Interface Software Examples Entering one of the following set wiSnmp wfSnmpDisable 0 1 s
228. ms Open Systems Interconnection Specification of Abstract Syntax Notation One ISO 8824 308657 14 00 Rev 00 A 7 Using Technician Interface Software Also the latest editions of the following textbooks provide information about these standards e Comer Douglas E Internetworking with TCP IP Vol 1 Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall e Rose Marshall T The Simple Book Englewood Cliffs New Jersey Prentice Hall e Stevens Richard W TCP IP Illustrated Vol 1 Reading Massachusetts Addison Wesley Implementation Notes The following notes list the assumptions made about MIB II object definitions supported traps unsupported objects and unsupported operations MIB II Object Definitions The assumptions about MIB II object definitions are as follows ifNumber ifIndex Represents the total number of rows in the interface table Represents a unique integer corresponding to a data link layer entity ifIndex values are derived from Nortel Networks circuit numbers A single interface or a group of interfaces multiline can be a member of a single circuit With a single interface a single ifIndex value matching the circuit number is allocated and the ifTable statistics correspond to the single interface With a group of interfaces a single ifIndex value is still allocated however the ifTable statistics are aggregated for all interfaces in the circuit group Four statistics require special consider
229. n a router you must enter the circuit number after the c option flag for that command Example The following ip command displays all IP routes accessible via circuit 4 on the router The command shows the contents of the cache for an unnumbered IP interface on circuit 4 ip cache 0 0 0 0 c4 You can determine the circuit number from the router s active MIB by using the Technician Interface get command in a variety of ways Example The following command retrieves the circuit number attribute 6 for every entry in the FDDI Line_ Table g wiFddiEntry 6 wfFddiEntry wfFDDICct 5 1 1 The table has a single line entry Example The following command retrieves the circuit number attribute 6 for every entry in the CSMACD Line_Table g WICSMACDEntry 6 wfCSMACDEntry wfCSMACDCct 2 1 3 wf CSMACDEntry wfCSMACDCct 2 3 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 75 Using Technician Interface Software Example The following command retrieves the circuit number attribute 5 for every entry in the IP Interface table g wilpInterfaceEntry 5 wfIpInterfaceEntry wfIpInterfaceCircuit 192 32 174 33 3 3 wfIpInterfaceEntry wfIpInterfaceCircuit 192 32 174 66 4 4 wfIpInterfaceEntry wfIpInterfaceCircuit 192 32 174 98 2 2 wfIpInterfaceEntry wfIpInterfaceCircuit 192 32 175 66 1 1 The instance ID for each entry in this case is lt I P_address circuit_number gt Example The following command retrieves the circ
230. n has been created the new volume is referred to as lt vol gt b and the existing volume is referred to as either lt vol gt a or lt vol gt Caution Be careful when deleting a partition When you issue the partition delete command without specifying a subvolume all files on lt vol gt b are lost Examples partition create 1 Divides memory card or SIMM volume 1 into two volumes storing all existing files in volume 1a and creating and formatting a new volume 1b partition delete 1b Removes volume 1b files included or partition delete 1 4 20 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 5 Managing Event Logs You can use the Technician Interface to Specify events you want to include in or exclude from the events log Specify events you want to display from the events log Save an events log to a file Configure the router to save the events log to a new file automatically when the log becomes full Display an events log file previously saved Clear event messages from the events log For information on specific events locate the events database for BayRS routers on the documentation web site see the preface To learn how to search for events in the database click on Help 308657 14 00 Rev 00 5 1 Using Technician Interface Software Overview The operating software in each processor module logs events in a first in first out FIFO memory buffer When you issue a command to display or save the current log
231. n the user entry This feature allows you to use the same value for more than one parameter see the last two examples Examples alias scroll more scroll on alias cp copy 2 1 3 2 cp config2 cfg alt cfg alias backup copy 2 1 3 1 backup config Creates an alias named scroll that invokes the more command and inserts the value the user enters when using the alias as shown in the next example Invokes the command more on Creates an alias named cp that accepts two values and inserts them in parameter positions 1 and 2 respectively as shown in the next example Invokes the copy command associated with the alias cp inserts the config2 cfg value in the first parameter position 1 and inserts the alt cfg value in the second parameter 2 The system then invokes the command it copies the config2 cfg file on slot 2 to a new file alt cfg on slot 3 Creates an alias named backup that takes the first value the user enters when using the alias and inserts it in both parameter positions indicated by 1 as shown in the next example Invokes the copy command associated with the alias backup inserts the config value in the parameter positions indicated by 1 in the lt alias_value gt and copies the config file from slot 2 to slot 3 8 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Aliases Inserting Character Strings in an Alias The echo command prints one or more strings of characters to the
232. nd file transfer in progress UNIX only You can enable or disable logging of xmodem events using the I flag or cancel a particular file transfer by entering Control x B 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files Command Parameters When you enter an xmodem command at the Technician Interface command line prompt follow the entry with only one of the following parameters Parameter Name Meaning or Action sb Send Binary Sends files as they exist on disk or in flash memory without conversion st Send Text Sends ASCII text files rb Receive Binary Places files on disk or in flash memory without conversion YMODEM deletes existing files of the same name rt Receive Text Receives ASCII text files Command Options After you enter the xmodem command parameter that is appropriate for the operation you need to perform sb rb enter e They option flag for any send binary or send receive operation e The w option flag for any send binary operation e The p option flag for any xmodem command you use to set the UNIX workstation in either send binary or receive binary mode e Thee option flag for any xmodem command you use to transfer files to the router using the Windows Terminal program The xmodem option flags relevant to the YMODEM single or batch file transfer protocol have the meanings shown in Table B 1 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 5 Using Technician Interface Software Table B 1 Option
233. ne slot number is equivalent to entering the boot command Enter the following to reset the entire system reset The system returns the following message Reset all slots y n If you still want to reset all slots enter y yes Entering n no terminates the command Note With multiple slot routers such as the BLN and BLN 2 a local flash volume serves as a backup source for files required by any slot you want to reset For this reason multiple slot routers running Version 7 60 or later with the dynamic loading feature must contain a flash volume that contains a copy of the router s software image The following events occur when you reset a processor module 1 The GAME operating system software running on the processor module forwards a boot request to the other processor modules 2 The first processor module to respond to the boot request forwards the router software image resident in its memory 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 21 Using Technician Interface Software 6 The resetting processor module receives and executes the router software image At this instant connectivity to the associated slot and the services provided in the slot are disrupted The other processor modules resynchronize their routing tables after the slot fails to receive packets The resetting processor module completes the boot process and requests a configuration The first available processor module forwards the configura
234. ng command after the Technician Interface prompt logout For a console connected directly to the router the Login prompt reappears Login lt User Manager gt Password lt password gt if enabled Passcode lt passcode gt if enabled For a remote terminal program on a PC or workstation connected to the router by modem the following messages appear and the Technician Interface hangs up the telephone TI session logged out Goodbye Note For information on using the Technician Interface with a modem see Chapter 2 If the Modem Enable parameter has a setting of Disable default and the session terminates unexpectedly the router does not automatically log you out You must reconnect to the router and log out using the logout command 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Introducing the Technician Interface Starting a Manager Session from Within a User Session You can initiate a Manager session within a User session by entering the following command system The Password prompt appears at this time if your network administrator configured a password for Manager access Enter the password after the prompt The Technician Interface prompt appears when the system logs you in Enter logout to terminate the Manager session You return to the User session when the Technician Interface prompt reappears Using Technician Interface Scripts The Technician Interface scripts are programs that let you manage the router u
235. ng command to display the events stored in all event buffers log The system sorts the events and displays them in chronological order For information about the event display format or about specific events see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager Note To stop the command press Control c hold the control key and press c 308657 14 00 Rev 00 5 5 Using Technician Interface Software Add arguments to the log command to select the event types you want to display Enter the log command as follows to limit the display of events log lt vol gt lt log_file gt d lt date gt t lt time gt e lt entity gt f lt severity gt s lt siot_ID gt p lt rate gt c lt code_no gt w You can enter any combination of the following optional parameters lt vol gt lt log_file gt is the volume number or letter where a log file is located and the name of the log file The system displays the events saved to this file lt date gt is the date in mm dd yy format The system displays the events logged on and after that date lt time gt is the time in hh mm ss format The time you can enter ranges from 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 The system displays the events logged at and after that time lt entity gt is a software service that logs events Quotes are required when the lt entity gt contains spaces Use uppercase letters when specifying the lt entity gt lt severity gt is one or more letter
236. node addresses in decimal or hexadecimal format If you use hexadecimal format precede each address with the Ox prefix t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt are optional These parameters are as follows lt timeout gt is the number of seconds for each ping to time out If the system receives a response to a ping after it has timed out the system does not send an alive message to the console The default is 5 lt repeat_count gt is the number of ping messages to send The system does not wait for the timeout before sending the next ping Enter a value from 0 to 10 The default is 1 lt size gt is the number of bytes of data to send with each ping The default is 16 The console displays one of the following messages when you issue a ping command If you enter a value in the lt repeat_count gt argument the system displays one of the following messages for the default ping plus one for each additional ping e Analive message This message appears if the system receives a response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed The message also indicates the size of the test packet A sample message follows AT ping 100 5 is alive size 16 bytes 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 23 Using Technician Interface Software e Adoes not respond message This message appears if the address of the target device is resolved but the system does not receive a response from the target device within the
237. ns of the software without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS ii 308657 14 00 Rev 00 UNDER WHICH NORTEL NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License Grant Nortel Networks NA Inc Nortel Networks grants the end user of the Software Licensee a personal nonexclusive nontransferable license a to use the Software either on a single computer
238. nse ping ipv6 Same as above but displays the intervening hop 3FFE 1300 0003 0011 0000 0001 addresses to the destination and the time it took A2A5 2159 p to reach them before displaying the response message for each ping For example the console displays the following messages CIE 2 3FFE 1300 0100 0005 004C 3F6A time 5 ms 2 Tf 2 3FFE 1300 0100 000B 0000 5E10 AF4B 0101 time 8 ms 3 If 2 3FFE 1300 0002 0024 0200 A2FF FE0B AE7E time 1 ms Ay IE 2 3FFE 1300 0003 0011 0000 0001 A2A5 52159 time 1 ms ping ipv6 FE80 004C 3F6A i2 Provides additional information about the r3 v repeated ping of a link local IPv6 address FE80 004C 3F6A from interface index 2 For example the console displays the following messages 16 bytes from FE80 004C 3F6A via If 2 icmp_seq 0 time 5 ms 16 bytes from FE80 004C 3F6A via If 2 icmp_seq 1 time 6 ms 16 bytes from FE80 004C 3F6A via If 2 icmp_seq 2 time 6 ms IPV6 PING Statistics IPV6 ping FE80 004C 3F6A responded to 3 out of 3 100 success round trip ms min avg max 5 5 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 13 Using Technician Interface Software IPX Ping When you issue the ping command for IPX the router sends an IPX configuration request packet to the remote IPX address that you specify If the remote device is listening on socket number 456h for an IPX configuration request packet it resp
239. nsole Messages to a File cesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeecaeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeneeeaaes 7 53 Enabling Internal Clocking Mode iiis EE EAT RAT errr iaiia EA 7 55 FMesp nding ta GENET Underlow Errors iusiose nenenwnuee 7 55 Morniionng IP ROUES ane ene Oe ee aoe Ore TT a a ren er eater ts 7 56 Pec iin AS Pail Search Paeng scienne aar e asane aar ear 7 66 Fonuna TAER orui aan A A antes Mention aaa 7 68 Interface Cache ccccsscnrscn mbes errr ooi T PT pastels aie eben anes FBO PMID RI asset tet i a A O G E decade aevenees 7 70 Sormena CACHE gs cen eatinasstierinaderiabt tant a aaa R a aiii 7 71 DVMRP Caches A ET see aedi PAT ETA 7 72 Viewing the Multicast Table Manager Forwarding Cache ccceeceeeseeeeneeees 7 73 oB EEE EE Ne SiO A A T E A sun E E padaioaine 7 74 Determining Circul WINS canes da cesacevacce vent aiaa eia 7 75 308657 14 00 Rev 00 ix Displaying the OSI Link State Database 0 cccccceeeeececeteeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeestteeeeteeee 176 Monitoring IPv6 Routes Perret pecs niaiso oppen jorika PAT ineng irens E eee Obtaining IPv6 Route and Node Information cecccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 7 78 Obtaining Pw Interface Statistics cc soc osusss csiulinie meni canta ceaiieiietaeenie 7 82 Setting Modem Initialization Strings 0 eeceeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeens re 7 83 Technician Interface Commands and Access Levels c
240. nsole display The default port 755 will be used for SecurID services If you entered a different port number the following message appears on your console or Telnet display The port lt port_number gt will be used for SecurID services Is this information correct yes no yes If you entered no go to step 4 otherwise securelogin replies Telnet login now requires SecurID followed by Reinitialize Client yes no yes a If you entered no go to step 3b otherwise securelogin replies Client reinitialized You have completed the procedure The SecurID client software on the router has been reinitialized If you want to disable SecurID login for Telnet users follow the procedure in the next section Disabling SecurID Authentication a If you entered no securelogin replies with Client not reinitialized You have completed the procedure but the SecurID client software on the router has not been reinitialized You entered no indicating that the information about the SecurID setup was incorrect securelogin replies Do you still wish telnet login to require SecurID yes no yes If you entered yes return to step 2 if you entered no go to step 5 You entered no indicating that you do not want Telnet users to encounter the SecurID login procedure securelogin replies Securelogin information remains unchanged Are you sure you want to turn off secure ID yes no yes If you entered yes securelog
241. nstance_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 33 308657 14 00 Rev 00 5 9 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Autosave Volume Attribute Name wfSerialPortAutoSave Volume Attribute Name 34 Default None Options Any valid memory card volume slot number from 1 to 14 or the diskette drive designation a Function Specifies the target volume where the system stores new log files saved through the log autosave feature Instructions Specify the memory card or diskette file system volume where the system will save log files automatically through the log autosave feature Command set wfSerialPortEntry 34 lt instance_no gt lt option gt MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 34 Log Autosave Platform Differences This section describes platform specific differences you need to consider before attempting to configure the log autosave feature on any Nortel Networks router Models AN ANH BLN BLN 2 and BCN Each model supports only one instance of the wfSerialPortEntry object For that instance you can configure the log autosave attributes wfSerialPortAutoSaveNumFiles and wfSerialPortAutoSave Volume Model ASN Supports four instances of the wfSerialPortEntry object Each instance corresponds to one of the four slots possible in an ASN stack Enable the log autosave feature only on one occupied slot in the ASN stack Models 5380 and 5580 System 5000 hubs support up to 14 inst
242. nt to examine 7 70 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Slot Internal Cache The router operating system maintains an internal cache storage space on and for each slot in the router This slot level internal cache stores routing information captured from traffic originated on the router For example the PING protocol the IP protocols and TFTP can each generate their own traffic destined for IP address locations internal or external to the router The internal cache provides to such protocols a local high speed database of best routes from that slot to any other IP destination address in your network If the protocol application cannot find in the internal cache a route to the desired destination then it searches the main routing table to find one Once the application finds a route in the main routing table it adds that route to the internal cache for the local slot If the routing table changes with old routes replaced by new routes the changes also propagate to the internal cache on the same slot The internal cache is limited and fixed in size and operates on a first in first out FIFO basis For this reason cache entries routes also have a finite lifetime determined by the size depth of the internal cache The larger the size of the internal cache the longer it takes for an entry in that cache to disappear With the ip command you can examine e The entire contents of the internal cache on any slot
243. nterface ID Displays the IPX route record for the instance ID of the particular route you specify ipx_server lt instance_ID gt Displays the IPX server table for the instance ID of the particular server you specify ipxinr lt interface_ID gt ipxind lt nterface_ID gt ipx_it Displays the IPX interface table including the state of the interfaces The states are 1 Up 2 Down ipx_rt Displays the metrics of all routes ipx_st Displays the names of all servers Displays the number of packets received on a specific interface Displays the number of packets RIP or SAP received on a specific interface ipxforwd lt interface_ID gt ipxoutr lt interface_ID gt Displays the number of packets forwarded on a specific interface Displays the number of out requests RIPs and SAPs originated from the router for the interface you specify ipx_stat lt interface_ID gt Displays the last four aliases on the interface you specify ipx_nexthop lt instance_ D gt Displays the next hop for the network you specify Ibbase Displays all Learning bridge global configuration parameters base record Ibfwd Displays all node MAC addresses in the bridge s forwarding table Ibif lt index gt Displays bridge information for the interface index you enter You can obtain the lt index gt by using the Ibstate alias continued 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 15 Using Tec
244. ntil the SecurID client denies you further access to the router Figure 1 2 shows the complete new PIN assignment procedure and interface dialog you encounter during your initial login attempt if you do not already have a valid assigned SecurID PIN To configure the SecurID client software on the router see Enabling and Disabling SecurID Authentication in Chapter 7 308657 14 00 Rev 00 1 7 Using Technician Interface Software Open a Telnet connection to the router gt telnet lt router_name gt Trying lt router_ip_address gt Connected to lt router_name gt Escape character is BEGIN HERE yes Is your card in Set PIN to next cardcode mode SecurlD authentication enabled on the router Your first login attempt using SecurlD authentication Enter a passcode after the Enter Passcode prompt from the router lt User Manager gt Login Password lt password gt Enter Passcode lt passcode gt Access denied password bad Access denied cardcode bad no no Fourth a authen tempt to icate Valid cardcode Enter next cardcode yes Fourth login attempt PIN accepted by the Lp Se O Figure 1 2 Enter only your Login level User Manager and if enabled enter a password Login lt User Manager gt Password lt password gt Valid password
245. o prevent the loss of event messages you may want to capture as you begin to enable Syslog on each router UNIX workstations have a syslog conf file in which you define destinations for event messages received by the local Syslogd software module For Syslogd to properly dispatch router event messages to a file display printer and or another remote host you must edit the contents of the etc syslog conf file Configure Syslogd on your UNIX workstation as follows 1 Log in as superuser as follows su root 2 Open etc syslog conf and examine the lt facility level gt indicators local lt 0 7 gt lt fault warning info trace debug gt 3 Edit etc syslog conf as needed to achieve message handling appropriate for your management workstation requirements See the examples on page C 13 4 Save the changes you made to syslog conf 5 Enter the UNIX ps command to obtain the process ID for the Syslogd process currently running on the workstation 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events 6 Reinitialize Syslogd by entering the following command at the UNIX command line prompt kill HUP lt process_id gt To view on a UNIX workstation event messages from a Nortel Networks router open the file you designated on the workstation to receive Syslog messages from routers in your network Example Messages dispatched to console display local7 debug local7 info local7 notice loca
246. oftware Parameter Host Time Seq Enable Attribute Name wfSyslogLogTimeSeqEnable Attribute Number 6 Default 2 Disable Options 1 Enable 2 Disable Function Enables or disables time sequencing and forwarding of Syslog event messages to the remote host associated with this host entry Instructions Enable this feature only if the remote host must receive Syslog messages in the order in which they were logged on the router When you enable this feature Syslog on each slot e Polls the local events log e Retrieves messages from the local log e Filters the messages e Time sequences messages that pass through the filters e Forwards sequenced messages to IP on the router which in turn forwards the messages to the remote host associated with this entry When you disable this feature Syslog on each slot e Polls the local events log e Retrieves messages from the local log e Filters the messages e Forwards sequenced messages to IP on the router which in turn forwards the messages to the remote host associated with this entry Command set wfSyslogHostEniry wfSyslogLogTImeSeqEnable lt host_IP_address gt lt 1 2 gt MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 2 1 6 C 34 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Host Operational State wfSyslogHostOperState 7 2
247. og Event Lower Bound If you do not want to filter by event code accept the upper and lower boundary default values of 0 and 255 In this case Syslog checks for filtering criteria based on a message severity mask wfSyslogEntFltrSevMask If you specify lower and upper boundary values of 255 the wildcard entity number Syslog ignores this attribute as filtering criterion set wiSyslogEntFitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 255 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 39 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Severity Mask wfSyslogEntFltrSev Mask 9 None w warning i information t trace f fault d debug Use individually such as f or d or combined such as fwitd Identifies the severity levels of events you want to forward Syslog uses this severity mask as filtering criteria only if you specify the wildcard event number range 0 to 255 as the values for wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd and wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd Syslog looks only for events that have the severity levels you specify If you specify a range of event numbers using the Log Evt Lower Bound and Log Evt Upper Bound parameters Syslog ignores the Severity Mask parameter If you do not specify a range of event numbers Syslog
248. og Messaging to Monitor Router Events Log Evt Upper Bound wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd 8 255 0 to 255 Along with the Log Evt Lower Bound this parameter specifies an event number code or range of event numbers The numbers correspond to event messages you want to forward to the remote host associated with this filter For a complete list of event codes for each entity see event database for BayRS routers for this version of the router software To specify a range of event numbers that identify messages you want to forward to a remote host set the value of this parameter to the high number of the range Set the value of the wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd Log Event Upper Bound parameter to the low number of the range Any range you specify includes the values for the lower and upper bound parameters For example if you specify a lower bound of 2 and an upper bound of 7 Syslog forwards all messages with event codes of 2 through 7 logged by the entity defined under wfSyslogEntFltrNum Filter Entity Name Syslog ignores all other event messages To filter select only a specific event set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd to the code number for that event Set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd Log Event Lower Bound to the same code number For example to forward only log messages that have an event code of 10 enter 10 as the value of wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd and as the value of the wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd L
249. og Poll C 30 Maximum Hosts C 30 Messaging Enable C 32 Operational State C 29 Severity Mask C 40 Slot Lower Bound C 41 Slot Upper Bound C 42 Trace Map C 45 Warning Map C 44 remote host address C 9 parameters C 31 syslog conf file on UNIX workstation C 12 system command 1 13 Index 8 T technical publications xxv technical support xxvi Technician Interface accessing via ASCII terminal 1 2 accessing via Telnet connection 1 2 establishing multiple sessions 2 2 initializing 1 3 logging out 1 12 Site Manager differences between 1 2 telnet command 3 6 connection to router 1 1 Terminal Interface Program tip B 10 terminating a command 3 3 text conventions XX TFTP 4 13 tftp command 4 13 ti cfg file 2 19 4 10 time setting 7 39 timeout command entry 2 13 login 1 11 password 1 11 2 13 Secure ID 1 11 tip command B 10 Transaction Program 3 26 type command 4 16 U unalias command 8 7 underflow errors QENET 7 55 user session command access levels 7 84 to 7 87 starting manager session from within 1 13 terminating 1 12 User s Login Script parameter 2 16 user s login script setting 2 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 V verbose command for debugging aliases 8 7 verbose option ping command 3 8 3 10 3 11 3 13 VINES ping command 3 20 to 3 22 volume changing the active 4 11 displaying directory on 4 7 displaying the active 4 11 WwW Welcome
250. ollowing in mind when you enter your login name User or Manager and password If you do not make an entry at the Login prompt for 1 minute default the Technician Interface disconnects from the router If you do not make an entry at the Password prompt for 1 minute default the Technician Interface returns you to the Login prompt If you enter your login name or password incorrectly three times default the Technician Interface disconnects you from the router If you do not make an entry at the SecurID prompt for 1 minute default the Technician Interface returns you to the Login prompt If you enter the SecurID PASSCODE incorrectly four times default the SecurID client software disconnects you from the router and initiates deactivation of your SecurID card account You must request reactivation from the SecurID administrator for your network 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software Login Configuration For instructions on changing the default values associated with the console port see Configuring Console Port Parameters in Chapter 2 For instructions on changing the default values associated with Telnet access to the Technician Interface see Configuring IP Utilities For information about changing the default values associated with SecurID services see Enabling and Disabling SecurID Authentication in Chapter 7 Logging Out To exit a Technician Interface session enter the followi
251. on circuits of an octal sync link module you can customize the depth of search for tokens to replace data patterns sent and received by the optional octal sync hardware compression daughterboard Note For more information about hardware and software compression services see Configuring Data Compression Services 7 48 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration By increasing the search depth you may enable the daughterboard to attain compression ratios higher than are possible using default or inherited search depth values The results you achieve depend greatly on the type of data you want to compress over a circuit or line Note however that increasing the compression ratio beyond a certain value on a circuit or line may also lower the throughput on that circuit or line Configure search depth attributes for the best trade off between compression ratio and end to end for example workstation to workstation throughput on the circuit or line Use Technician Interface commands to customize e wfWcpLineSearchDepth e wfWcpCircuitSearchDepth Note Only expert network technicians or administrators should attempt to modify the set value of these WCP attributes You cannot modify these attributes from a Site Manager workstation Testing Compression and Throughput Perform the following tests before and after making any change to the set values of the line and circuit WCP search depth attributes e Measure end to end throug
252. onds if it can be reached and the console displays a message indicating that the device is alive Of does not respond Note The router also listens for and responds to pings based on the NetWare Link Service Protocol NLSP However NLSP based ping is not currently an option of the ping ipx command on the router IPX configuration request packets typically obtain configuration information from other devices on a NetWare network The router uses these packets to test the reachability of a remote device that listens for and responds to IPX configuration request packets Note The Nortel Networks IPX router will neither send nor acknowledge IPX configuration request packets addressed to network 0x00000000 local network destination or network OxXFFFFFFFF or host 0x000000000000 or host OXFFFFFFFFFFFF broadcast host destination The IPX router responds only to request packets sent directly to one of its interface addresses If you send a request packet from a router to an IPX interface on that same router the router does not send the request packet out onto the line Instead the router sends the packet internally to the specified interface which then responds internally Enter the following to ping a remote device running IPX ping ipx lt PX_address gt t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt lt IPX_address gt is the required IPX address in hexadecimal or decimal notation of the remote device An IPX address in h
253. onse to each ping The console displays one of the following for each ping sent OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 is alive OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 does not respond OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 is unreachable The console also displays the following type of message after reporting the progress of each ping OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 responded to 8 out of 8 100 success 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 19 Using Technician Interface Software VINES Ping When you issue the ping command for VINES to a remote VINES device it responds if it can be reached and the console displays the response or the result of the request Enter the following to ping a remote device running VINES ping vines lt network_address gt lt host_address gt t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt S lt size gt p lt network_address gt lt host_address gt is the required VINES address of the remote device This address consists of a 32 bit serial number identifying the server node and a 16 bit subnetwork number identifying the node within the server node s logical grouping Note You can enter the network and host addresses in decimal or hexadecimal format If you use hexadecimal format precede each address with the Ox prefix t lt timeout gt r lt repeat_count gt s lt size gt p are optional These parameters are as follows lt timeout gt is the number of seconds for each ping to time out If the system
254. or example quitting the terminal interface program for example tip or Wfterm fails to switch the modem to an on hook state Going on hook should cause the dialed connection between the local and the remote modems to be dropped You may also encounter differences in modem interface cabling requirements B 8 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files For more detailed information about these and other modem related issues see the user manual for the modem you want to use for Technician Interface access Viewing xmodem Log Events To view the log information for xmodem YMODEM file transfers enter the following command at the Technician Interface command line prompt log eXMODEM fdi Hardware Configuration Figure B 1 Modem Dial network Modem To transfer files out of band between any Nortel Networks router and a remote workstation you use the hardware configuration shown in Figure B 1 Figure B 1 shows how to connect a Nortel Networks router and workstation to a dial network using two Hayes compatible modems With this configuration you use a remote PC or UNIX workstation The configuration supports a remote connection to the router s Technician Interface m i TS0005A Modem Connection Note Use a network interface cable to connect a modem to the dial network Use an RS 232 C modem cable to connect a workstation or Nortel Network
255. ortEntry 19 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 19 Login Script Search Path wfSerialPortInitialSearchPath 28 2 A string of valid volume numbers depending on your login ID Manager or User Specifies a list of file system volumes for the system to search if the manager or the user login script file does not contain a volume specification The environment variable PATH is set to this string Accept the default value 2 to search for the Technician Interface autoscript files on volume 2 Otherwise enter a text string that uses the format lt vol gt lt vol gt For example enter A 1 2 or 2 4 6 9 set wfSerialPortEntry 28 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 28 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Configuring the Console Port Manager s Login Script wfSerialPortManagerAutoScript 29 automgr bat The name of the manager login script file Executes the manager s login script file automatically at login If you did not change the name of the manager s login script file accept the default Otherwise enter the name of your manager s login script file This name can have up to eight characters followed by up to a three character extension If the login script file does not contain a volume specification the system sear
256. ory to the directory that contains the files you want to transfer to the router 2 Enter a dir command if necessary to view the list of files in the directory 3 Determine which files you need to transfer from the workstation to the router 4 Enter a tip command on the workstation to open a dial connection between the workstation and the desired router For example tip modem0 modem0 designates the workstation port that accommodates the dial modem attached to the workstation The system displays the following message Connected 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 13 Using Technician Interface Software 5 Press Return to invoke the Technician Interface login prompt from the target router The system displays the following prompt Login 6 Enter Manager and a password if necessary to log in to the router s Technician Interface The system displays the following message and prompt Welcome to the lt Node_Type gt Technician Interface 7 Enter a cd command to designate the disk volume or memory card volume that should receive the files you want to transfer from your UNIX workstation For example cd a designates diskette volume a or cd 2 designates a memory card volume in router slot 2 8 Enter the xmodem receive binary command as follows xmodem rby rb is a receive binary file y is the YMODEM file transfer option 9 Type c tilde c to escape momentarily from the Technician Interface co
257. ot exe on a flash card that resides on the least utilized slot in the system e Perform the upgrade during non peak hours to ensure a minimum traffic load on the router e On multislot systems upgrade the PROM for each slot separately Attempting to upgrade multiple slots at the same time increases the load on the backplane Determining Current PROM Image Versions To decide whether or not you need to upgrade the PROMs in a router you need to determine the versions of boot and diagnostics PROM images currently running in that router Note A label on the back panel of some router models indicates the installed version of boot and diagnostic PROMs 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 33 Using Technician Interface Software Determining the Version of the Current Boot PROM Image To determine the version number of boot PROM images residing in a router start a Telnet session with the router and enter the following command at the Technician Interface prompt get wfHweEntry 19 With a Model BLN router for example information similar to the following appears with one wfHwEnt ry wfHwBootPromSource line for each slot wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource 1 nil wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource 2 rel 13 30 freboot exe wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource 3 rel 13 30 freboot exe wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource 4 rel 13 30 freboot exe wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource 5 rel 13 30 freboot exe Each line of respon
258. ou can close the connection between the workstation and the router See Closing the Connection on page B 30 Transferring Files from a PC Workstation to a Router To transfer one or more files from your Site Manager workstation to a router you must 1 Log in to the Technician Interface of the desired router If necessary see Logging In to the Router s Technician Interface on page B 24 2 Select the disk volume or memory card volume that should receive the file you want to transfer from your workstation 3 Set the receiving Technician Interface into binary receive mode 4 Set the sending Wfterm utility into binary send mode 5 Select the disk volume directory and file you want to send to the router 6 Trigger or initiate the file transfer from workstation to router Proceed as follows to transfer one or more files from you workstation to the router 1 At the Technician Interface command line prompt enter a cd command to designate the disk volume or memory card volume that should receive the desired file from the workstation For example cd a designates diskette volume a or cd 2 designates a memory card volume in router slot 2 At the Technician Interface command line prompt enter the xmodem receive binary command as follows xmodem rbye rb is a receive binary file y is the YMODEM file transfer option B 28 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer
259. ou observe are inappropriate for the type of data link and modem attached to the remote target router you can enter new settings dynamically through the Wfterm Communications Settings window You access this window by choosing the Settings from the Modem menu in the Wfterm startup window as shown in Figure B 4 Choosing this option opens the window shown in Figure B S 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 19 Using Technician Interface Software Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program Fil File ESCOLA Phone File Transfers Help Settings Connect Ctrl C Figure B 4 Accessing the Modem Settings Window Communications Settings Port Baud rate Comi Com3 300 2400 9600 38400 OCom2 Com4 1200 4800 19200 Data bits __ M Parity Oa O6 8 even mark none O58 O7 odd space Stop bits Flush Time Seconds 1 015 O2 a ee Break Time Hundredths C Xon Xxoff DTR Time Hundredths O Yield Figure B 5 Verifying or Modifying Modem Interface Settings The settings shown in Figure B 5 reflect default operational values for any Hayes compatible modem However if you are sure that current interface settings for the modem locally attached to your Site Manager workstation are correct proceed to the next section Initializing the Local Modem B 20 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files If you are unsure of the cu
260. out the file Platform Key indicates the platform that the file is intended to run on Workspace indicates the software release and software integration numbers Compression indicates whether the file is compressed The executable files are normally compressed Revision indicates the software release Last Modified indicates the day date and time of the software release File type indicates that the file is executable Tool name is for Nortel Networks use only 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 31 Using Technician Interface Software Examples readexe frediag exe Calculates file header and image checksums on the frediag exe file located on the active volume verifies that the header and image checksums match those within the file and displays the results and all file header information readexe 3 freboot exe Calculates file header and image checksums on the freboot exe file located on volume 3 verifies that the header and image checksums match those within the file and displays the results and all file header information Upgrading and Verifying a PROM You use the prom command to upgrade or verify the software on a diagnostics or bootstrap PROM in a Nortel Networks router platform Only users who login as Manager can access the prom command I f a software release includes a PROM software upgrade see the upgrade documentation shipped with the software for instructions on upgrading the PROMs on your
261. ptional e Enter a backslash before every quote character inside the lt alias_value gt This includes the quotes in an echo command embedded within the lt alias_value gt e Enter a backslash before the following characters when you use them literally another backslash a percent sign or a dollar sign at the last character position of the lt alias_value gt e Limit the lt alias_value gt to 255 bytes just over three 80 character lines You can create an alias that invokes other aliases by entering the alias command and nesting up to 15 other aliases in the lt alias_value gt argument Separate the aliases with a space and a semicolon see the last example in the examples that follow When you create an alias the system stores it in memory Use the save command described on page 8 8 to save the aliases in RAM to a file for later retrieval The system can store up to 100 aliases in memory provided that memory is not dedicated to other tasks so limit the number of aliases in an alias file to 100 You can store as many alias files in your file system as space allows 8 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Examples alias alias ebridge set wfBrTp 2 0 1 set wiBrStp 2 0 1 commit ebridge alias gbridge get wfBrTp 2 0 get wfBrSip 2 0 alias sbridge ebridge gbridge Inserting Parameters in an Alias Managing Aliases Displays all aliases residing in RAM Creates an alias named ebridg
262. r alias list See Chapter 5 Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 for more information about these applications of the save command Console Port Parameters This section describes parameters for configuring the serial console port on the router Each parameter description includes the following e Parameter e Attribute name e Attribute number e Nortel Networks default setting e Options or range of valid settings e Parameter s function e Instructions for setting the parameter 2 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring the Console Port Command you enter to configure or monitor the parameter MIB object ID Note You cannot configure the following console port parameters State Number Name and Slot Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Port Delete wfSerialPortDelete 1 1 Create 1 Create 2 Delete Creates or deletes an instance of a console port Set to 1 Create to create a MIB record with system defaults for a console port Set to 2 Delete to delete a MIB record for a console port set wfSerialPortEntry 1 lt port_no gt lt option gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 11 1 1 1 Port Disable wfSerialPortDisable 2 1 Enable 1 Enable 2 Disable Enables or disables the console port Select th
263. rameter to the high number of the range Any range you specify includes the values for the lower and upper bound parameters For example if you specify a lower bound of 2 and an upper bound of 7 Syslog forwards all messages with event codes of 2 through 7 logged by the entity defined under wfSyslogEntFltrNum Filter Entity Name Syslog ignores all other event messages To filter a specific event set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd to the code number for that event Set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd Log Evt Upper Bound to the same code number For example to forward only log messages that have an event code of 10 enter 10 as the value of wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd and as the value of the wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtUppBnd Log Evt Upper Bound If you do not want to filter by event code accept the lower and upper bound default values of 0 to 255 In this case Syslog checks for filtering criteria based on a message severity mask wfSyslogEntFltrSevMask If you specify lower and upper boundary values of 255 the wildcard entity number Syslog ignores this attribute as filtering criterion set wiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrLogEvtLowBnd lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 255 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 7 C 38 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Using Sysl
264. rameters If no applications reside on a slot the message No dynamically loadable modules on SLOT appears 7 38 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration No dynamically loadable modules on SLOT 4 Loadmap from SLOT 2 gt vines exe Ox304a5c60 0118168 gt drs exe 0x30467550 0060288 gt tms380 exe 0x304760e0 0089652 gt hdlc exe Ox304caafO 0055608 gt dst exe 0x30526400 0004052 Loadmap from SLOT 5 gt fr exe 0x310b9f00 0026760 gt hdlc exe 0x310c67d0 0055608 gt qsync exe 0x3111c630 0004008 Loadmap from SLOT 3 gt arp exe 0x3048c0d0 0008816 gt ipx exe 0x303fec60 0087680 gt at exe 0Ox303e4e90 0105916 gt vines exe 0x30448f20 0118168 gt ftp exe 0x30418310 0042060 gt tcp exe 0x30422770 0057040 gt tftp exe 0x304b9c90 0020680 gt snmp exe 0x30430650 0030344 gt tn exe Ox304bed70 0038424 gt ip exe 0x3048e350 0178468 gt ilacc exe Ox304cb670 0011872 gt qenet exe 0x30523f10 0004072 Resetting the Date and Time The date command allows you to display or change the system date time or time zone offset The time is based on the 24 hour clock The offset is the time difference between the current time and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Enter the following to display the system date time and GMT offset date The date time and GMT offset are displayed in mm dd yy hh mm ss hh mm format For example Aug 29 1997 1
265. ration e An operational IP routing path exists through your network between the file source a router or a remote workstation and the file destination also a router or a remote workstation Out of band file transfers are typically a less efficient but sometimes useful method for example for router diagnosis and management You use this method most beneficially when e You can dial in to the Technician Interface port of a router you choose as the source or destination for a file transfer operation e All IP routing paths between the file source and the file destination are down nonoperational You can use either a UNIX or PC remote workstation to transfer files in band or out of band using Technician Interface xmodem commands as operating conditions within your network allow 4 12 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System In Band File Transfers The tftp command invokes the Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP software to transfer a file between a Nortel Networks router and another router or host capable of serving tftp file transfer requests The TFTP software resides within the IP router Consequently you must load TFTP on the router and enable it see Quick Starting Routers for instructions When you transfer a file to a Nortel Networks router unless you specify the target volume the TFTP server of the receiving client router uses the value of the wfTftp 2 0 MIB attribute to determine the target vo
266. rcuit level independently using wfWcpCircuitSearchDepth any virtual circuit you configure on this line inherits the setting for line search depth Compression ratios may improve with settings higher than the default value of 3 however throughput may actually decrease for settings higher than 12 or 13 The compression engine yields higher compression ratios but takes longer to find token matches for the data being sent over the line Nortel Networks does not recommend settings higher than 13 Accept the default value or choose a customized search depth value that provides the best trade off between compression ratio and throughput on this line Test end to end throughput and line utilization before and after modifying the WCP search depth attributes set wiWcpLineEntry wfWcpLineSearchDepth lt 0 255 gt 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 22 1 1 9 7 50 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Parameter WCP Circuit Search Depth Attribute Name wfWcpCircuitSearchDepth Attribute Number 7 Default 256 Options 0 no compression on this circuit to 255 maximum compression on this circuit or 256 inherit wfWcpLineSearchDepth value on this circuit Function Defines the depth of searching for repetitive patterns in the data you want to send over a specific virtual circuit Whenever you choose a customized value within the range 0 to 255 for wfWcepCircuitSearchDepth you automatically choose not to inherit the wfWcpLineSearchD
267. ribe the Technician Interface commands you use to manage the security feature 7 46 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Setting the System Administration Router to Operate in Secure Mode The wfsnmpmode command allows you to specify whether or not you want the router to operate in SNMP secure mode Enter the wisnmpmode command in the following format wfsnmpmode 1 3 1 trivial indicates that the router should provide no additional security beyond a simple community name 3 proprietary indicates that the router should operate using our proprietary security mechanism Note Do not use the default Public community and wildcard manager 0 0 0 0 with the router in SNMP secure mode Instead configure a specific SNMP community and manager address For more information about how to configure SNMP communities see Configuring SNMP BOOTP DHCP and RARP Services Setting the Encryption Key Use the wfsnmpkey command to specify the key that the encryption algorithm uses when it encrypts the security counters The encryption algorithm uses the attributes of the key size range and value as integral parts of its encryption process Also when Site Manager issues the first set request within an application it prompts you to enter this key as a password that enables Site Manager to operate in secure mode Enter the command in the following format wfsnmpkey lt key gt lt key gt is the string of ACSII characters that make
268. rkstation Pressing return to execute the xmodem command triggers the necessary handshakes between the YMODEM protocol program running on the workstation and the YMODEM program running on the router This handshaking in turn triggers the start of the file transfers you specified in the xmodem command entered at the Technician Interface command line prompt 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files Typical workstation and router responses are XMODEM File Receive Function CRC mode requested on command line YMODEM Batch Protocol YMODEM Batch Receive Complet away for 37 seconds the amount of time the router s Technician Interface relinquished control to the router s YMODEM protocol program in other words the duration of the file transfer operation 11 If you are finished transferring files from the router to the remote workstation enter logout at the Technician Interface command line prompt This action returns control to the UNIX workstation command line prompt 12 Enter the Is command to list the contents of the current receiving directory to verify that the file transfer completed successfully Transferring Files from a UNIX Workstation to a Router To transfer one or more files from your UNIX remote workstation to a Nortel Networks router use the following procedure 1 At the UNIX command line prompt enter a cd command to change if necessary from the current direct
269. rkstation and router responses are XMODEM Send Function File Name atl cfg File Size 7k 56 Records 7160 Bytes Estimated transmission time 9 seconds Receiver invoked CRC mode on ACK on sector 1 Sector 0 sent Sector 32 sent Send Complete 56 Sectors Transferred in 31 seconds Transfer Rate 231 Characters per Second Closing down Batch Transmission Non ACK on Sector 1 Sector 0 sent Batch Send Complete away for 40 seconds the amount of time the workstation s command line relinquished control to the workstation s YMODEM protocol program that is the duration of the file transfer operation Enter the dir command to list the contents of the receiving volume in order to verify that the file transfer completed successfully If you are finished transferring files from the router to the workstation enter logout This action returns control to the UNIX workstation command line prompt B 16 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files Out of Band File Transfers from a Windows Workstation This section describes the Nortel Networks Communications Terminal Program and its applications for logging in to the Technician Interface of a remote router and for transferring files to and from a router xmodem and the Nortel Networks Communications Terminal Program The Nortel Networks Communications Terminal Program file name wfterm exe is an ASCII terminal emulation utility include
270. rkway PO Box 58185 Santa Clara California 95054 8185 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN NORTEL NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST NORTEL NETWORKS UNLESS NORTEL NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT iv 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Contents Preface nl sie so ee eee eee E T ene eet eer tee cere deter rear cry ere rere eter rr ere ee cere xix PTE MEAS occ sacoes teats twesceicnnn sera vadactsecdadense T XX PRC MOUNTS sscsskcierdastnantearanaausss ii naaenn satiate Mae a TRAN xxii Hard Copy Technical Manuals seiouriuisiisveiesinreasa iur eaaa aE Sanii Nn XXV Fon to Get HoN irao aS G a xxvi Chapter 1 Introducing the Technician Interface Diterences fom Sie Manager seasiairnrccanevniinane naaa sneak Sata A 1 2 Running ihe Technician WSIS sensensirenmisiii S 1 3 PVR IIT UAE sce cen ty ses e a E SENA 1 3 LISS PTAA OF Logit csisisiissina a 1 3 Lodin aih OO as uc chsscecic seccctin aasaceute tas tua tin hativanis taseae ins iaaeslnd a ava 1 4 EUR WUE CUED ccc cokacazoes See csearebanatsealtseaia eb aonutectwts
271. rmation about syslog syslogd and syslog conf C 46 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Symbols command 3 3 A access levels manager 7 84 to 7 87 user 7 84 to 7 87 password protection 1 3 via SecurID 1 3 acronyms xxii alias command 8 2 aliases creating 8 2 debugging 8 7 debugging network problems with predefined 8 10 definition of 8 1 deleting from memory 8 7 displaying 8 2 file 4 9 in debug al file 8 10 to 8 19 inserting character strings in 8 5 inserting parameters in 8 3 loading from a file 8 9 managing 8 1 to 8 19 saving to a file 8 8 an exe image 4 4 an exe image file 4 9 AN ARN ASN configuring boot and config file source 7 2 to 7 8 anboot exe PROM image file 4 9 andiag exe PROM image file 4 9 APING 3 26 AppleTalk ping command 3 23 to 3 25 applications viewing addresses and sizes of 7 38 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Index APPN ping command 3 26 to 3 28 arn exe image file 4 9 AS search patterns 7 66 asn exe image 4 4 4 9 asnboot exe 4 9 asnboot exe PROM image file 4 9 asndiag exe PROM image file 4 9 atmarp command 3 29 autosave log 5 9 Autoscript parameters Force User Logout 2 17 Login Script Search Path 2 14 Manager s Login Script 2 15 User s Login Script 2 16 autoscripts at manager login 2 20 at user login 2 20 automgr bat 2 19 to 2 20 autouser bat 2 19 to 2 20 customizing 2 21 samples 2 20 baud rate setting 2 8 bconfig command 7 3 to 7 4 BGP routes
272. rrent modem interface settings see the user manual supplied with the modem make the required changes to the modem interface settings and then proceed to the next section Initializing the Local Modem Initializing the Local Modem Before attempting to open a dial connection between your workstation and a remote target router you need to initialize and wake up the modem locally attached to the PC You initialize the modem by choosing Connect from the Wfterm Modem menu You verify that the local modem has initialized successfully when you observe and respond to the message window shown in Figure B 6 Qe Modem Initialized Figure B 6 Verifying Successful Modem Initialization Click on OK The following message appears below the Modem Initialized window ATSO 0 OK With the local modem online and initialized you can access and use the telephone call functions supported by the Wfterm utility as described in the next section Using Wfterm Telephone Call Functions 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 21 Using Technician Interface Software Using Wfterm Telephone Call Functions You can access two telephone call functions from the Phone menu of the Wfterm startup window as shown in Figure B 7 Wellfleet Communication Terminal Program File Modem SLUGS File Transfers Help Dial Phone Ctrl D Hangup Ctrl H Figure B 7 Accessing Wfterm Telephone Call Functions Dialing a Remote Router To dial and
273. s show at lt valid_route gt valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it screen text Indicates system output for example prompts and system messages Example set Trap Monitor Filters separator gt Shows menu paths Example Protocols gt IP identifies the IP option on the Protocols menu vertical line Separates choices for command keywords and arguments Enter only one of the choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both 308657 14 00 Rev 00 xxi Using Technician Interface Software Acronyms ACE APPN ARP AT ATM AURP BGP BootP CLNP CPU CRC CSMA CD DCM DLCMI DLSw DRAM DSAP DVMRP EOF EGP FAT FDDI FIFO FR FRSW FTP advanced communications engine Advanced Peer to Peer Networking Address Resolution Protocol Appletalk asynchronous transfer mode Appletalk Update based Routing Protocol Border Gateway Protocol Bootstrap Protocol Connectionless Network Protocol central processing unit cyclic redundancy check carrier sense multiple access with collision detection Data Collection Module Data Link Control Management Interface data link switching dynamic random access memory destination service access point Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol end of file Exterior Gateway Protocol file allocation table
274. s and space for each volume dir V Displays all files on a volume format Erases any existing files on a volume and formats the volume partition Partitions file system media into two volumes save Saves the current software configuration aliases or events to a file See Chapter 5 Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 for instructions on the Save command tftp Transfers a file to or from the router type Vv Displays the contents of a file in ASCII or hexadecimal format Using Multiple Memory Cards This section describes how to manage multiple memory cards on the router You may want to allocate them as follows e Keep one card as the primary card used for booting e Use another card for redundancy If you are providing redundancy be sure to copy files that you modify to the redundant volumes e Use another card as temporary storage for log files and test configuration files 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Technician Interface Software The system boots from the default router software image Table 4 2 and configuration file config if you do not specify the boot image and configuration file when booting See Table 4 2 for a list of router software images associated with particular routers and processor modules Table 4 2 Router Software Images Image Router Processor an exe AN ANH Motorola CPU arn exe ARN Motorola CPU asn exe ASN Motorola CPU bn exe BLN BLN 2 BCN FRE or FRE 2 module s5000 e
275. s router to a modem Use cable Order No 7825 for all except BLN BLN 2 and BCN routers Use cable Order No 77850 only for BLN BLN 2 and BCN routers 308657 14 00 Rev 00 B 9 Using Technician Interface Software Out of Band File Transfers from a UNIX Workstation This section provides the procedures you need to e Open a dial connection between your workstation and a specific router e Transfer files to or from a router e Close hang up the connection between the workstation and router Opening a Connection On a SunOS platform you can use the Terminal Interface Program or tip command to e Establish a connection to the Technician Interface port of a router e Initiate file transfers to and from the router e Close the connection between the remote workstation and the router For detailed information about how to set up and use tip and its related files etc phones and etc remote on a Sun workstation enter man tip at the UNIX command line prompt The workstation responds by displaying all of the information that is available on tip in the UNIX online command reference manual You enter modem interface settings into the etc remote file You enter dial information a telephone number in the etc phones file Transferring Files from a Router to a UNIX Workstation To transfer one or more files from a Nortel Networks router to your UNIX workstation use the following procedure 1 At the UNIX command line prompt
276. s a route update Route ages may be different on each slot for this reason Interface Cache The router operating system allocates a cache storage space to each protocol specific logical interface that you define on any physical circuit of the router The interface cache stores routing information relevant only to itself and its own view of the networks external to the router This cache provides an initial source for an interface to retrieve at high speed the best routes to any other IP destination address in your network Upon receiving a packet the interface checks its local cache then specifies processing for the packet e Encaps processing The packet will be forwarded out of the interface e Reassembly processing The packet is for this router e Redirect processing An ICMP redirect packet is sent from the interface back to the source e Net Unreachable processing An ICMP net unreachable packet is sent from the interface back to the source e Host Unreachable processing An ICMP host unreachable packet is sent from the interface back to the source 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 69 Using Technician Interface Software e ARP processing The packet has been held and an ARP request packet has been sent to the LAN for that host When the address is resolved the cache entry for this host is flushed deleted and the packet is forwarded e Multicast processing The packet will be handled using information from the
277. s from gt the events log Figure C 2 Using Syslog Messaging to Monitor Router Events Entity filter for one host Select by event number range i Filtered i event i Select by Select by slot 1 messages entity OR a number range gt fora number i designated S Select by event remote i host severity levels TS0002B Router Event Message Filtering for One Host Polling the Events Log Syslog polls the events log buffer on the local slot to retrieve any new messages logged since the previous polling attempt Syslog polls the local slot at an interval determined by the value of the wfSyslogPollTimer poll timer attribute You can accept the system default value or set your own value for this attribute Identifying Entity Filters Each protocol and system service in the router software has a unique entity number The router software uses an entity number plus the IP address of a specific remote host to identify each entity filter you configure on the router For example if you configure a filter that selects only messages logged by entity number 2 IP on a router Syslog forwards those messages only to the host IP address associated with that filter You must also assign a filter index number wfSyslogEntFltrIndex to each filter you configure for the same entity and remote host pair Assign a value of 1 to the first filter To each subs
278. s pruned the branch or not When a branch is pruned there are no downstream dependencies for the source group pair and the router does not forward traffic When a branch is not pruned the router does have downstream dependencies for the source group pair and must forward traffic For each outgoing circuit the dvmrp_caches command lists the local outgoing circuit numbers and whether or not they are active that is whether or not each circuit is forwarding traffic An A next to a circuit number indicates that the circuit is active an I next to a circuit number indicates that the circuit is inactive For more information about DVMRP see Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services 7 72 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Viewing the Multicast Table Manager Forwarding Cache The Multicast Table Manager MTM maintains a multicast forwarding cache table The ip mtm command allows you to view the cache table for a particular slot To view the MTM cache enter the ip command using the following syntax ip mtm s lt slot gt lt slot gt is the slot number associated with the MTM cache you want to examine You must enter a slot number for the ip mtm command For the cache entry associated with each source group pair the command output indicates a list of incoming circuits a list of outgoing circuits and a slot mask indicating the slots on which there are outgoing circuits An incoming circuit is represented by t
279. sages when you issue a ping command If you enter a value in the lt repeat_count gt argument the system displays one of the following messages for the default ping plus one for each additional ping An alive message This message appears if the system receives an ICMP echo response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed The message also indicates the size of the test packet A sample message follows IPV6 ping If 2 3FFE 1300 0003 0011 0000 0001 A2A5 2159 is alive size 16 bytes A does not respond message This message appears if the system does not receive an ICMP echo response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows IPV6 ping If 2 3FFE 1300 0003 0011 0000 0001 A2A5 2159 does not respond Atarget address is unreachable message The local Nortel Networks router previously issued an ICMP host unreachable from y y y y message Within 40 seconds the local Nortel Networks router received a subsequent ICMP echo request addressed to the same target device The ARP timed out or the address could not be resolved A sample message follows IPV6 ping 3FFE 1300 0003 0011 0000 0001 A2A5 2159 is Unreachable 3 12 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands Examples ping ipv6 Pings the device at the IPv6 address 3FFE 1300 0003 0011 0000 0001 3FFE 1300 0003 001 1 0000 0001 A2A5 2159 A2A5 2159 and waits up to 5 seconds default for a respo
280. scceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeee 7 84 Chapter 8 Managing Aliases Creating ine Displaying Ai PUBS secscicccn dastietin cepted nieve nce aia a 8 2 hserting Parameters in an AlaS aces ccssscoeesces toed cases seenaueisteecunbisdeedeuoutuecersesionceutinds 8 3 inserting Character Sirings Man AaS ccssccesactansvicceensestaaetupivdaarssorideactessvaionts aneuvaatots 8 5 Dopu Gn AI O es R 8 7 Deleting an Alias trom MEMORY sidsusenmstsnimaieba isin anasan ier aaae 8 7 Saving Aliases O a FIE orcii aa a aai tendon 8 8 Loadng Alass Oma FIO saad snns 8 sdeevnsidsdaseantia RA 8 9 Debugging with Predefined Aliases ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeneenenees EE E 8 10 Appendix A Using the Nortel Networks Router MIB EEE E A O E A T E A E N acd OE A 2 Nortel Networks Rouler MIB PilOS sisccsssismescosssestecdsnkescaesniscaivbsesenceaWanimbadendnner A 7 Compliance with SpeciNeationE ririri sa ecg es ea eee a edd AN A 7 apemon DOn NOS naa a A 8 MIB OBEC DENIOS sirrinin aia ae Ena eA i A 8 ESN VID Wit e AA TN A 9 Unsupported Operations ei ere oreniats T PETT T T n A 10 Ere Number ATIDIOS arpada a A 10 Appendix B Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files OO E coira or ee a e EEE B 1 PREM MRT MN WIN osasia E SE a B 2 The xmodem Command E PT iaai PST EET PAIET Rinsa EI APEE B 3 Commend Parameters sarren naa eer des bas palenes conpean ds aude ia batailenduadeeeuea ts B 5 Gommand GIONS eee ereenetneT mere n Toren tre
281. screen customizing the 1 10 wfOsiFletchRelaxedEnable 7 76 wfsnmpkey command 7 47 wfsnmpmode command 7 47 wfsnmpseed command 7 48 Wfterm accessing from Site Manager B 18 dialing a remote router B 22 file transfer functions B 24 initializing local modem B 21 logging into the Technician Interface B 24 modem interface settings B 19 opening B 18 overview B 17 telephone call functions B 22 wildcards 4 2 4 3 Xx xmodem command option flags B 5 command parameters B 5 command syntax B 3 filename conventions B 7 implementation notes B 7 to B 9 overview B 2 YMODEM protocol B 2 xmodem command 4 12 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Index 9
282. screen pauses setting 2 11 scripts Technician Interface 1 2 1 13 scrolling the Technician Interface screen 3 2 secure mode managing 7 46 to 7 48 SecurID access 1 3 login and PIN assignment 1 6 security counter resetting 7 48 set command 2 3 6 6 show command 1 13 Site Manager 1 2 slot number displaying 2 7 resetting 7 21 restarting 7 20 Technician Interface running on 1 3 software displaying version 7 27 upgrading 7 28 verifying 7 28 source aliases command 8 9 spanning tree 6 7 SRM L board 2 1 to 2 2 stamp command 7 27 Standard Point to Point protocol 7 6 state of a console port displaying 2 6 Index 7 stop bits setting 2 10 support Nortel Networks xxvi Syslog configuring the router for C 14 deleting from router C 24 deleting remote hosts or filters C 23 disabling or reenabling C 21 disabling or reenabling remote hosts or filters C 22 entity filter parameters C 36 example configuration C 24 global parameters C 28 IP header C 9 mapping router events to Syslog format C 8 message filtering diagram C 5 parameter descriptions C 26 parameters Debug Map C 45 Delete C 28 Enable C 28 Entity Filter Delete C 36 Entity Filter Enable C 36 Fault Map C 43 Filter Operational State C 37 Host Delete C 31 Host Log Facility C 33 Host Operational State C 35 Host Time Seq Enable C 34 Host UDP Port C 33 Info Map C 44 Log Evt Lower Bound C 38 Log Evt Upper Bound C 39 L
283. se to the command specifies e A slot number for example wfHwEntry wfHwBootPromSource 2 identifies slot 2 e A path name that contains the version number of the image stored in the boot PROM for example re1 13 30 freboot exe identifies the Version 13 30 boot PROM image freboot exe in slot 2 Note The command does not return a boot PROM version number for slot 1 because slot 1 contains a System Resource Module SRM This applies to all router models except the AN and ASN Determining the Version of the Current Diagnostics PROM Image To determine the version number of DIAG PROM images residing in a router start a Telnet session with the router and enter the following command at the Technician Interface prompt get wfHwEntry 16 7 34 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration With a Model BLN router for example information similar to the following appears with one wfHwEntry wfHwDiagPromSource line for each slot y fHwEntry wfHwDiagPromSource 3 fHwEntry wfHwDiagPromSource 4 fHwEntry wfHwDiagPromSource 5 fHwEntry wfHwDiagPromSource 2 harpdiag rel v4 00 wf pj harpoon ss image p frediag exe harpdiag rel v4 00 wf pj harpoon ss image p frediag exe harpdiag rel v4 00 wf pj harpoon ss image p frediag exe harpdiag rel v4 00 wf pj harpoon ss image p frediag exe Each line of response to the command specifies Using the pro
284. sensaisanisnnniennnni aa ee Ve Bociek Dal EE A A EAT T E O N EA A T E N 4 16 Compacting File GPACE srieniriisri nakani a n ano a aN Eai 4 18 Formana a Neno Gid nanganana a T NA 4 18 Transferring a File to a Full Memory Card seemed rere DONIS PE aes eer 4 19 Partitioning a Memory Card or SIMM sescciasciascianited scstanensasecnundvctntasnedsine tele sceadnienaswcnuse 4 19 Chapter 5 Managing Event Logs EE T E N dc daaed Saks E Meta dace E E dee eee 5 2 Legging and Displaying Event Messages icsiscssscssissinstsssnscissnnsinuasseinwiseiinndsssniies 5 2 Applying Write Filters to the Events Log cccnasccceissasccecesasusenscsasastntessausacterssasteeeeivassnts 5 3 Displaying Active Write FURS cssict sccccanas dace dopuaseetenanecciadannpucne rE 5 5 Applying Read Display Filters to the Events Log ccccecseesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 5 5 Saving the Events Log usa N re ener T T T aenn aena mai DT Saving the Events Log Automatically s iiicisvoseseti sede ivan ioidantadi a iaieds aie 5 9 Log Autosave Platform Differentes sc coissssts sists oes eles aca ieee eas 5 10 Configuring the Log Autosave Feature acccscisccdacescsscicsscncesdcceiolaescacecandesauenteeiskecance 5 11 Depang an Evens Loo File susasonniiini mes siashedornaasd aanauhepeadabeaaiahe TNS 5 12 Clearing Events ereit mimes seins oenen eee ironi gorau Ranat ete bis sein le Chapter 6 Accessing the MIB Listig ME CDEC sc itreasdcatocians cada tuain ca lotions
285. ses e SYS routes installed by the IPv6 kernel n Retrieves data for all network routes h Retrieves data for all local node host routes Displays data in long format that is provides additional route information including the type of route interface the next hop IPv6 address and when the route was last updated Note Dynamically learned adjacent node addresses appear only when you apply the pDN option 7 78 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration The IPv6 column headings have the following meanings Prefix Indicates the prefix address and prefix length from 1 to 128 bits of the IPv6 route Protocol Indicates the IPv6 interface protocol type The protocol types are as follows e DIRECT directly attached networks e STATIC static network routes e RIPv6 RIPv6 routes IDRP IDRP routes e INTERFACE local interface routes e StatNode static adjacent node addresses e DynNode dynamically learned adjacent node addresses e SYSTEM routes installed by the IPv6 kernel Next Hop Intf Indicates the IPv6 interface index of the next hop for forwarded packets Weight Indicates the weight value assigned to the IPv6 route The router uses the weight value internally to determine the best route When various routing protocols calculate routes to the same destination they provide a weight value to indicate the cost of each route The router compares the various weight values and chooses th
286. siewsnavetis sistendon aan ieat C 26 Global Group Parameters creme iirc ioien ee meee EET C 28 Host Parameters ridice n ia a E E AESA EN C 31 PURO Filer eS aioe Acucd creases iiaa NEENA EEA EEEN C 36 For More Information sssrinin a auan PEAS tre asni AEn P T C 46 xii 308657 14 00 Rev 00 308657 14 00 Rev 00 xiii Figures Figure 1 1 SecurlD Login Procedure and Interface Dialog esceeeeeeetteeeteees 1 8 Figure 1 2 _ SecurlD PIN Assignment Procedure and Interface Dialog 0 1 9 Pau d t Sample Dino DIDIA siucair onar aieiaa eara a aA Aani 4 6 Figure 4 2 Sample NVFS Directory Listing eseeeeesseeesseesssesssessssesssnsssnsssnnsssnnssunsss 4 8 Figure 7 1 RUIBOOT Date and Time Entry eee T S T sad AS Figure 7 2 RUIBOOT Date and Time Example cicccccccescsccsscccesstecececcesssesestiencncceestess 7 17 Figure 7 3 Sample Response to readexe Command ccccceeceteeeeteeeeteeeteeeaes 7 30 Figure A 1 Sample Top Level Hierarchy of Nortel Networks Router MIB Objects A 6 Foue Bi Modem Connect sascndernenseaansttnereeanadiaan ai B 9 Howe B2 Wierm ICON sssaaa aeaa E EE B 18 Figure B 3 The Witerm Base Program WINGOW cciccccntenssscatssseccnecensssessssnnrtanresmane B 18 Figure B 4 Accessing the Modem Settings Window sssesseesseessseesseessressresressns B 20 Figure B 5 Verifying or Modifying Modem Interface Settings sect betas PEPA B 20 Figure B 6 Verifying
287. sing information stored in the management information base MIB You can use the scripts to display information about protocols and network services and to enable or disable protocols circuits lines and services You access the Technician Interface scripts using the following commands e show displays system configuration state and statistical information This command helps you isolate problems such as circuits that are not working packets that are not being forwarded and so on e monitor displays the same information as the show command but refreshes the display periodically so you can examine trends and changes e enable disable enables or disables system features protocols drivers or individual circuits e menu provides a menu interface to the other scripts You can also use the menu building features of this script to create custom menus A number of Technician Interface scripts exist as programs embedded within the router software image rather than as individually loadable batch files file name lt entity_name gt bat You run the embedded and batch file versions of scripts in an identical manner using the script commands described in Using Technician Interface Scripts The embedded scripts run more efficiently than scripts based on loadable batch files 308657 14 00 Rev 00 1 13 Using Technician Interface Software The router software currently includes embedded scripts for the following router software entities
288. son this section covers information on the YMODEM protocol only For information on the other protocols supported by xmodem commands see For More Information later in this appendix B 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Out of Band Access to Transfer Files In support of Nortel Networks router file management tasks the YMODEM batch protocol has the following capabilities Supports batch file transfers moving one or more files specified in a single xmodem command Automatically converts file names received during batch file transfer operations Transfers binary files with error detection Marks every transferred file with a timestamp which indicates the most recent modification date of a file Automatically deletes a file unsuccessfully transferred between a router and a workstation Allows you to cancel a file transfer operation while that operation is still in progress YMODEM transfers binary files intact with no padding and using a default packet size of 128 bytes To use the YMODEM protocol a Nortel Networks router does not require access in band to the IP network on which a source destination remote workstation also resides Instead you use out of band dial network access from the UNIX or PC workstation to run Technician Interface xmodem commands and conduct file transfers through a modem You are most likely to use the YMODEM protocol to move files when your IP network is down or impaired The xmodem Command
289. space int 7 2 28 Compression ON Revision 722 Last Modifed Tuesday December 30 18 44 14 1997 File type Executable file as name Oasys Linker p TS0015A Figure 7 3 Sample Response to readexe Command The system response to the readexe command contains the following information Validating header checksum The system calculates a checksum on the file header and compares the checksum to the current data in the checksum field of the file header The system reports that the header checksum is OK if the values match or BAD if they do not match 7 30 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration e Validating image checksum The system calculates a checksum on the file image data and compares the checksum to the current data in the checksum field of the image The system reports that the image checksum is OK if the values match or BAD if they do not match e Program execution address space provides information about where the file is located in memory Load Address indicates the memory location Size indicates the size of the file Entry point indicates the location in memory of the first software instruction when the file is loaded into memory This field is 0 if the file is compressed e PROM storage address space indicates the location in the PROM for the frediag exe and freboot exe software This field is 0 if the file is not stored in a PROM e Input file information contains the following information ab
290. specify for the boot event Figure 7 1 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Octet 1 Octet2 Octet3 Octet4 Octet5 Octet 6 Octet 7 Octet 8 Octet 9 Octet 10 Octet 11 lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt lt deci seconds gt lt direction_offset_from_UTC gt lt hours_offset_from_UTC gt lt minutes_offset_from_UTC gt TSOO06A Figure 7 1 RUIBOOT Date and Time Entry 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 15 Using Technician Interface Software The following table specifies acceptable values for each octet of lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt Field Values decimal notation Octet No Year 1996 to 9999 1 and 2 Month 1 to 12 3 Day 1 to 31 4 Hour 0 to 23 5 Minute 0 to 59 6 Second 0 to 60 7 Deci seconds 0to9 8 Direction offset from UTC ASCII 43 for 9 ASCII 45 for Hours offset from UTC Oto 11 10 Minutes offset from UTC 0 to 59 11 Use 60 for leap second Example Schedule a boot event for May 26 1996 at 1 30 15 p m where the actual time and date at the location of the target router is offset from UTC GMT by 9 hours and 22 minutes If you have already enabled scheduled boot services on the router enter the following command line at the Technician Interface prompt set wfRuiBootEntry wfRuiBootDateAndTime 19 96 05 26 13 30 15 00 45 09 22 Figure 8
291. stem 1 13 save config 6 9 osi Isp 7 76 set 6 6 OSPF LSDB 7 57 wfsnmpkey 7 47 out of band file transfer wfsnmpmode 7 47 tip B 1 B 10 wfsnmpseed 7 48 xmodem B 1 B 3 Index 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 terminating 3 3 timeout condition 2 13 commit command 2 4 6 8 compact command 4 18 compression file 7 31 hardware 7 48 config file 4 9 7 10 configuring AN ARN ASN boot and config file source 7 8 for Telnet access 1 12 log autosave 5 9 the console port 1 12 configuring Syslog on a router C 14 connection dial in to router 1 1 telnet to router 1 1 console port parameters 2 4 Autosave Volume 2 18 Baud Rate 2 8 Command Timeout 2 13 Data Bits 2 9 Delete 2 5 Disable 2 5 Force User Logout 2 17 History Depth 2 17 Lines Per Screen 2 11 Login Retries 2 14 Login Script Search Path 2 14 Login Timeout 2 12 Manager s Login Script 2 15 Maximum Autosaved Files 2 18 Modem Enable 2 10 More 2 11 Password Timeout 2 13 Port Name 2 7 Port Number 2 6 Port Parity 2 9 Port Type 2 8 Slot Number 2 7 State 2 6 Stop Bits 2 10 User s Login Script 2 16 Control Point name 3 26 conventions text xx 308657 14 00 Rev 00 copy command 4 11 customer support xxvi D data bits setting 2 9 date command 7 39 debug aliases 8 10 to 8 19 debug al file 4 9 default file names 4 9 default settings IP interface 7 7 delayed boot 7 12 delete command 4 16 deleting a console port
292. t enter a dash as the configuration argument When the source is network enter only a dash to indicate no volume for the router software image or configuration file If you enter anything else the Technician Interface displays an error message The software image and configuration files revert to their respective default file names an exe asn exe bn exe or config after every boot To change the default boot or configuration file overwrite the old default file with the new default file using the copy command Be sure to back up the old default file using the copy command before overwriting it 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 41 Using Technician Interface Software Examples boot boot 2 2 or boot 2 bn exe 2 config boot 2 net1 exe 3 boot 3 2 Trident cfg boot 2 net1 exe 2 Trident cfg The system uses the default router software image for example bn exe and the configuration file config on the volume to come up with the valid boot name The system uses the default router software image on volume 2 and the default configuration file config on volume 2 The system uses the net exe router software image on volume 2 and the default configuration file config on volume 3 The system uses the default router software image on volume 3 and your customized configuration file Trident cfg on volume 2 The system uses the net1 exe router software image on volume 2 and your customized configuration file
293. t gt r lt repeat_count gt S lt size gt m lt mode gt are optional These parameters are as follows lt timeout gt is the number of seconds for each ping to time out If the system receives a response to a ping after it has timed out the system does not send an alive message to the console The default is 15 lt repeat_count gt is the number of ping messages to send The system does not wait for the timeout before sending the next ping The default is 1 lt size gt is the number of bytes of data to send with each ping The default is 100 lt mode name gt includes INTER BATCH INTERSC and BATCHSC as possible names INTER refers to the interactive mode that is where not much data is involved and response time is very important BATCH refers to a mode where a lot of data is involved and response time is not important INTERSC and BATCHSC are secure versions of INTER and BATCH If you do not specify a mode the mode defaults to a blank value 3 26 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using Operating Commands The console displays one of the following messages when you issue a ping command An alive message This message appears if the system receives a response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows APPN ping bay is alive A did not complete in the time allowed message This message appears if the node is alive but congested the data transfer time exceeded the timeout
294. t wfServices wfRuiBootLoad 0 0x7FFE0000 BN 3 commit This command allows RUIBOOT once created to run on all slots The hexadecimal value 0x7FFE0000 works for any model of Nortel Networks router regardless of the number of slots in that router 2 Add the RUIBOOT service to the router configuration as follows BN 3 set wfRuiBoot wfRuiBootBaseDelete 0 1 BN 3 commit These commands also enable scheduled boot services on the router The system sets the attribute wfRuiBootBaseDisable OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 14 1 1 in the RUIBOOT base record to its default value of 1 or enabled 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 13 Using Technician Interface Software Scheduling Boot Events You can schedule a boot event on a router as follows 1 Log in to the router Technician Interface of the router you want to configure with a scheduled boot event For instructions on logging in through a local console or remote Telnet session see Chapter 1 Configure a scheduled boot event To configure a scheduled boot event you must first create add an entry in the RUIBOOT table of scheduled boot events as follows BN 3 set wfRuiBootTable wfRuiBootDelete lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt 1 BN 3 commit Note that the instance ID lt wfRuiBootDateAndTime gt does the following e Specifies when the scheduled boot event will occur e Comprises 11 octets each of which contains in decimal notation one element of the date and time you want to
295. te it onto the diagnostics PROM The diagnostics PROM device supplies the FRE processor module with diagnostic instructions during a cold start If you want to verify that the image resident on the diagnostics PROM matches the frediag exe file use the prom v command The bootstrap image file is named freboot exe To upgrade with a new bootstrap image transfer the new freboot exe file to the file system issue the readexe command to validate it and issue the prom w command to load write it onto the bootstrap PROM The bootstrap PROM supplies the FRE module with bootstrap instructions during a cold start 7 28 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration If you want to verify that the image resident on the bootstrap PROM matches the freboot exe file use the prom v command e Router software image file for the various router models are named as follows AN ANH an exe ARN arn exe ASN asn exe BCN BLN BLN 2 bn exe System 5000 routers 55000 exe Models 5380 5580 and 5780 When the system boots it automatically loads the default router software image unless you specify another router software image from another slot into memory on the processor module or if another slot is unavailable from the file system to memory To upgrade with a new image transfer the image to the file system and reset the system do not use the prom w command when upgrading with a new router software image Note You cannot edit exec
296. te names and associated attribute identifiers of the wfCSMACDEntry object wf CSMACDDelete 1 wf CSMACDEnable 2 w CSMACDState 3 Displays all instance identifiers of the wfCSMACDEntry object configured on your system inst_ids 2 1 2 2 4 1 4 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 6 3 Using Technician Interface Software Getting MIB Values The get command displays the value of a MIB object You can also insert a wildcard character into the attribute name or into the instance identifier to display the values of multiple objects Enter the following to display one or more object identifiers and their associated values get lt object gt lt attribute gt lt instance gt or g lt object gt lt attribute gt lt instance gt lt object gt is the required object name or identifier lt attribute gt is the required name identifier or wildcard character of the object attributes The wildcard character displays all attributes of the object and their associated values lt instance gt is the optional name or identifier of the instance An asterisk in place of the instance displays all instances of the object and their associated values You can also indicate an asterisk as part of the instance identifier to display all instances that begin with the partial instance you specify For example if you enter the following command the system returns all instances of Attribute 1 wherever the instance ID also be
297. tem does not receive a response from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows VINES ping 2705682 8003 does not respond A lt target address gt is unreachable message This message appears if the local Nortel Networks router cannot find the specified address in its routing table A sample message follows VINES ping 2705682 8003 is unreachable An invalid parameter specified message This message appears if you specify an invalid parameter when you issue a ping vines command A sample message follows VINES ping invalid parameter specified A resource error message This message appears if the local Nortel Networks router cannot allocate a buffer for the request because none is available A sample message follows VINES ping resource error A VINES service is not running message This message appears if the VINES service is not enabled on the router A sample message follows VINES ping VINES service is not running 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 21 Using Technician Interface Software Examples ping vines 2705682 8003 ping vines 2705682 8003 p ping vines 2705682 8003 t3 r8 Pings the device at the VINES address 2705682 8003 and waits up to 5 seconds default for a response The console displays one of the following messages VINES ping 2705682 8003 is alive VINES ping 2705682 8003 does not respond VINES ping 2705682 8003 is unreachable All of
298. ter decifs Displays node and area configuration and interface indexes for all interfaces running DECnet continued 8 12 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Table 8 1 Managing Aliases Aliases for Debugging Network Problems continued If you enter The system decif lt index gt Displays DECnet information for the interface index you enter You can obtain the lt index gt by using the decifs alias decpri Displays DECnet circuit priorities for all interfaces deccost Displays DECnet circuit costs for all interfaces decstats Displays all DECnet receive transmit and dropped statistics enetstats Displays all Ethernet receive and transmit statistics fddior lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of FDDI octets received for the specified circuit fddifr lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of FDDI frames received for the specified circuit fddiot lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of FDDI octets transmitted for the specified circuit fddift lt circuit_no gt Displays the number of FDDI frames transmitted for the specified circuit fddi_stats Displays all FDDI receive and transmit packet statistics fddistat lt circuit_no gt Displays the state of the FDDI circuit fddistats lt circuit_no gt Displays all FDDI receive and transmit packet statistics for the specified circuit hwslot lt s ot_no gt Displays hardware
299. terface to use these autoscript files you must modify the following serial port parameters e Login Script Search Path e Manager s Login Script e User s Login Script e Force User Logout Use the Login Script Search Path parameter to specify the list of file system volumes to be searched You can set up separate autoscript files to run for the Manager login and the User login by configuring the Manager Login Script and User s Login Script parameters You can set the Force User Logout parameter when the User autoscript is in effect This parameter locks the user into the User autoscript When this parameter is enabled any attempt to abort the script results in the user being logged out The Technician Interface configuration file ti cfg looks for the automgr bat script when the Manager logs in or for the autouser bat script when the User logs in If the autoscript is not present login proceeds normally without any error messages The ti cfg file has a default search path of slots 1 to 14 and a volume A This works for any platform 308657 14 00 Rev 00 2 19 Using Technician Interface Software Sample Autoscript Files HEE EERE EEE HHH HEE FE FE EEE FE FE HHH He EEE REE FE AE EEE HH HH aE EEE FE FE AE AE AE FE EH HHH The following autoscript files for the Manager login and the User login are configured using the Technician Interface software Manager login autoscript alias alias
300. th of 0 bytes appears in the memory card s directory Before you transfer another file to the memory card you should optimize the available space by completing the following steps 1 Delete the file from the memory card using the delete command 2 Compact the file system using the compact command Partitioning a Memory Card or SIMM Memory partitioning enables you to use commands such as the compact command on one partitioned volume at a time Partitioning also enables you to store copies of boot images and configuration files on each partition to provide redundancy The partition command only works with a 4 MB or greater memory card or SIMM used with an AN or ASN loaded with Version 8 10 or later router software The command creates or deletes a partition on a specified volume or on the present working volume if a volume is not specified Such partitioning provides two independent file systems on two independent volumes Enter the following commands to partition the memory card or SIMM or delete a memory partition partition create lt vol gt partition delete lt vol gt When creating a partition the current file system cannot exceed one half the total media size For example if you are using an 8 MB memory card that contains files totaling more than 4 MB you need to remove or edit some of those files until they total 4 MB or less 308657 14 00 Rev 00 4 19 Using Technician Interface Software Once the partitio
301. the configuration save config lt vol gt lt filename gt Examples save config 2 config Overwrites the default configuration file config on volume 2 with the configuration in memory save config 2 config 2 Creates an alternate configuration file named config 2 on volume 2 and stores the configuration residing in memory in this file See Booting the Router in Chapter 7 for instructions on loading a configuration from a file Using the MIB II Counter You can use the MIB II counter feature with Router Software Version 8 10 and later The feature enables you to track the number of packets each circuit in the Nortel Networks router processes at the data link layer You can enable the Nortel Networks MIB to count all incoming and outgoing packets by using the set and commit commands with the following parameter 308657 14 00 Rev 00 6 9 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Options Instructions Command MIB Object ID MIB II Counters Enable wfSysMibCounterEnable 12 1 Enable 1 Enable 2 Disable Enables or disables the following five counters in the MIB for Version 8 10 and later router software e ifInUcastPkts e ifInNUCastPkts e IfINUnknownProtos e ifOutUcastPkts e ifOutNUcastPkts Set to 1 Enable to enable the five counters on all circuits and slots Set to 2 Disable to disable the counters on all circuits and slots set w
302. the test and reboot process may take anywhere from 2 1 2 minutes to 10 minutes to complete depending on the memory configuration of the board For example when you issue the diags command for a FRE 2 processor module with 8 MB of DRAM the process takes approximately 3 minutes to complete When you issue the diags command for a FRE 2 processor module with 32 MB of DRAM the process takes approximately 10 minutes to complete 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 25 Using Technician Interface Software Enabling and Disabling Diagnostics During the Power Up Sequence You can turn on and off the diagnostics for the AN ANH or ARN platforms for subsequent power cycles AN and ANH Power Up Diagnostic Option You can use the set command on AN and ANH routers to disable or reenable the power up diagnostics set P0 P1 Examples set P0 The router skips power up diagnostics at subsequent restarts set P1 The router executes all power up diagnostics at subsequent restarts Pressing the Reset button on the back panel of the AN for more than 5 seconds initiates a cold boot power up diagnostics execute even when disabled by the set P0 command ARN Diagnostics On Off Option For ARN platforms only the Technician Interface diags command supports an option to enable or disable diagnostics effective the next time you cycle power on the router Disabling the diagnostics results in a faster boot time but leaves the hardware components unverifie
303. thentication on a router you must also enter a password after the Password prompt that appears following your login entry Login lt User Manager gt Password lt password gt New routers initially have no password login requirements If your network administrator enables password access on a router the Password prompt appears when you attempt a login to that router We recommend password access to help establish access and data security for routers in your network For instructions on how to enable or disable password authentication on a router see Assigning Passwords in Chapter 7 Login with SecurlD SecurID is a feature for barring unauthorized users from accessing the Technician Interface on a Nortel Networks router through a Telnet session 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Introducing the Technician Interface If your network administrator has enabled this feature on a router you enter a SecurID PASSCODE after the Passcode prompt as follows Login lt User Manager gt Password lt password gt if enabled Passcode lt passcode gt When you enter a valid PASSCODE you receive Technician Interface login privileges to the router You receive on your Telnet access screen the Technician Interface login prompt or whatever your network administrator selects for the Telnet login prompt Each User or Manager authorized to access a router configured with an active SecurID client must have an electronic SecurID card issue
304. thernet random access memory Reverse Address Resolution Protocol routing information field Request for Comment service access point Synchronous Data Link Control single inline memory module switched multimegabit data service SubNetwork Access Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol source routing System Resources Module Link statistics thresholds and alarms shielded twisted pair switched services synchronous system controller board Transmission Control Protocol Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Telecommunication Network Trivial File Transfer Protocol Terminal Interface Program Transaction Program virtual circuit Virtual Network Systems XXIV 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Preface WAN wide area network XB translation bridge XNS Xerox Networking Systems Hard Copy Technical Manuals You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to support baynetworks com library tpubs Find the product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Using Adobe Acrobat Reader you can open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers You can download Acrobat Reader free from the Adobe Systems Web site www adobe com You can purchase selected documentation sets CDs and technical publications through the collateral catalog T
305. tination UDP port number on the remote host identified in the IP header UDP Data The UDP data field in the Syslog packet contains a reformatted router event message plus a priority code required by the remote host The remote host uses this information to decide how to handle messages received from a router Priority Code The example of a priority code and its text Figure C 4 consists of a facility code plus an error level code in the form facility error Priority code Facility level Facility code 23 Error level code 7 45 TSO004B Figure C 4 Syslog Message Composition 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 9 Using Technician Interface Software The facility code identifies a standard UNIX system facility that receives a message from an internal or external software entity The Local lt 0 7 gt UNIX system facilities receive event messages in Syslog format from routers in your network The following table relates UNIX system facility names to their respective facility codes on a workstation UNIX System Facility Name Facility Code equivalent decimal value Local 0 1 Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Local 4 Local 5 Local 6 Local 7 COIN OD A AJOJN The error level code identifies the severity level level of urgency of a received message for UNIX system handling decisions such as logging displaying printing or forwarding the message The following t
306. tion resident in its memory The resetting processor module loads the configuration image and initiates the services provided by the slot connectivity is thus reestablished The resetting processor module alerts the other processor modules that it can receive packets The other processor modules resynchronize their routing tables accordingly To reboot the entire system enter only reset at the command line prompt To reset processor modules by slot number enter the reset command as follows reset lt s ot_no gt Reset one slot reset lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt Reset a range of slots reset lt s ot_no gt lt slot_no gt Reset a list of slots Examples reset Resets the entire system reset 1 Resets slot 1 reset 1 5 Resets slots 1 2 3 4 and 5 reset 4 6 Resets slots 4 and 6 When you issue the reset or reset slot command from a local console rather than from a Telnet session the results depend on The slot number you designate in the command line The slot number from which you issue the command The model of Nortel Networks router 7 22 308657 14 00 Rev 00 e The type of router single slot or multislot System Administration Based on these variables the router system or slot performs a restart a warm boot or cold boot operation Table 7 4 describes the various responses the router can have to different reset commands Table 7 4 Router Reset Commands and Respones You
307. tworks Router MIB Objects A 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Using the Nortel Networks Router MIB Nortel Networks Router MIB Files A collection of ASCII files one per router entity together describe the Nortel Networks router MIB These files load automatically onto the Site Manager workstation or PC when you install the Site Manager software The Site Manager software modules read these files during startup Site Manager installs these files at wf mibs on PCs and at usr wf mibs on UNIX workstations For example the path to the PPP MIB definition file on a UNIX workstation is usr wf mibs ppp mib If you want to load these MIB files into a local MIB browser tool first load the file wfcommon mib otherwise you may experience errors using the browser tool Caution If you want to open any MIB file with an ASCII text editor do so with read only protection enabled This should eliminate the possibility of corrupting overwriting the contents of that file Compliance with Specifications The Nortel Networks router MIB complies with the standards described in the following documents with the exceptions noted in the Implementation Notes section e Concise MIB Definitions RFC 1212 e Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP based Internets MIB IT RFC 1213 e Structure and Identification of Management Information for TCP IP Based Internets SMI RFC 1155 Information Processing Syste
308. tworks Technician Interface commands you need to read this guide Before using this guide to issue Technician Interface commands you must complete the following procedures e Install the hardware platform e Use one of the following methods to establish a connection to the platform Connect the serial port of an ASCII terminal device for example a DEC VT100 directly to the console port of the platform Connect the serial port of a workstation or PC directly to the console port of the platform Run ASCII terminal emulation software on the workstation or PC Dial in to the console port of the platform from a workstation or PC running ASCII terminal emulation software This alternative requires one modem locally attached to your workstation or PC and another modem locally attached to the console port of the platform you want to access Establish a Telnet in band connection to the platform 308657 14 00 Rev 00 xix Using Technician Interface Software Note Before you can access the Technician Interface using Telnet the platform must have at least one assigned IP address Although there is no limit to the number of Telnet connections that you can make to the Technician Interface we recommend that you establish no more than one Telnet session per platform Text Conventions This guide uses the following text conventions angle brackets lt gt bold text braces brackets Indic
309. u can also embed parameter references within an echo command See the first example to see how this is done 308657 14 00 Rev 00 8 5 Using Technician Interface Software Examples alias ipstats echo echo IP Input Statistics echo get WfipInterfaceEntry 21 echo echo IP Output Statistics echo get WfipinterfaceEntry 24 The system creates an alias named ipstats that invokes the commands shown in quotes Note that the text wraps as you enter text past column 80 Do not press the Return key until you have entered the entire command ipstats The system displays the following IP Input Statistics wfIpInterfacel eI 9263286473 wfIpInterfacel 192 32 5021 wfIpInterfacel Entry wfIpInterfaceInReceives 141501 Entry wfIpInterfaceInReceives 4 41304 Entry wfIpInterfaceInReceives J1 92 63 2 LGs Le 25 938 wfIpInterfacel 192 532 12432 IP Output Sta wfIpInterface Entry wfIpInterfaceInReceives 1 130137 tistics Entry wfIpiInterfaceForwDatagr ams 192 32 6 4 3 149189 wfIpInterface ams 192 32 15 wfIpInterface ams 192 32 16 wfIpInterface Entry wfIpiInterfaceForwDatagr 21 4 28400 Entry wfIpiInterfaceForwDatagr 1 2 1086 Entry wfIpInterfaceForwDatagr ams 192 32 243 2 1 120635 8 6 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing Aliases Debugging Aliases The verbose command allows you to display the commands within an lt alias
310. uit number attribute 2 for every entry in the Circuit Name table g wfCircuitNameEntry 2 wfCircuitNameEntry wfCircuitNumber 1 1 wfCircuitNameEntry wfCircuitNumber 2 2 wfCircuitNameEntry wfCircuitNumber 3 3 wfCircuitNameEntry wfCircuitNumber 4 4 Displaying the OSI Link State Database To display all or a subset of the link state packet LSP elements in the OSI link state database use the osi Isp command You can use this information to help solve network problems For instructions on entering the osi Isp command see Configuring OSI Services Appendix B Using the Technician Interface osi Isp Command When transmitting a packet in which one of the bytes is zero OSI replaces the value of the checksum with 255 To prevent OSI from replacing the checksum byte with 255 you can enable the global OSI MIB attribute wfOsiFletchRelaxedEnable For instructions on enabling this attribute see Configuring OSI Services Appendix C Enabling the OSI MIB Attribute wfOsiFletchRelaxedEnable 7 76 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Monitoring IPv6 Routes The ip6 command allows you to display IPv6 data You choose the type of data by specifying a lt subcommand gt in the command line You can also selectively filter the data by specifying one or more lt option gt in the command line Enter the ip6 command as follows ip6 lt subcommand gt lt options gt lt subcommand gt lt toutes stats
311. ummary link IP network advertisement 4 summary link ASBR advertisement 5 external link advertisement See RFC 1583 for more information about LS Type Subnet mask to be combined with the destination address and then compared with the value in Destination If the value of Destination is 0 0 0 0 a default route then the mask is 0 0 0 0 Prefix 0 Indicates the costs of the various interfaces described in a router LS Type advertisement Also indicates the cost of each path described in summary link and AS external link advertisements Destination IP address for this route where 0 0 0 0 indicates a default route IP address of the next hop and next autonomous system AS of this route If the next hop is an unnumbered interface the command displays un IP cct lt n gt where nis the number of the circuit on which the interface is configured Origin of the path information EGP IGP or INCOMPLETE Remote address of a BGP peer Routing method through which the router learned this route Other Local Netmgmt ICMP EGP BGP Hello RIP IS IS OSPF or BGP A signed 32 bit integer used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements The larger the sequence number when compared as signed 32 bit integers the more recent the advertisement Number of the slot on which the network address mask is configured Weight value assigned to the route displayed only if you specify all routes A 308657 14 00
312. up the encryption key for this router The key can be no longer than six characters Note If you replace a board in a BCN BLN or BLN 2 router you should reenter the wfsnmpkey command to ensure that the key is updated for all slots 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 47 Using Technician Interface Software Resetting the Security Counter The wfsnmpseed command allows you to reset the counter used by the security mechanism Under normal operating conditions it is not necessary to reset the counter this command is mainly for debugging purposes To reset the seed counter enter the wisnmpseed command in the following format wfsnmpseed lt comm_name gt lt mgr_address gt l lt value gt lt value gt l lt value gt l lt value gt l lt value gt lt comm_name gt is the name of the SNMP community for which you want to reset the counter lt mgr_address gt is the address of the manager for which you want to reset the counter lt value gt is either a dash to indicate no change to a specific counter value or the value to which you want to reset the counter Example wfsnmpseed public 192 32 1 20 The manager with address 192 32 1 20 in 23 44 community public sets the second counter to 23 and the fourth counter to 44 The first third and fifth counters do not change Customizing Hardware Compression Search Depth If you have model BLN BLN 2 and BCN routers configured to run frame relay
313. utable files The sections that follow describe how to use the readexe prom w and prom v commands to validate upgrade and verify executable software Validating an Executable File You validate executable files before upgrading by using the readexe command This command calculates file header and image checksums on executable files on the file system verifies that the checksums match those within the files and displays the results and all file header information Enter the following command and parameter to validate an executable file on the active volume where lt filename gt is the name of the executable file readexe lt filename gt 308657 14 00 Rev 00 7 29 Using Technician Interface Software Enter the following command and parameters to validate an executable file on another volume readexe lt vol gt lt filename gt lt vol gt is the volume storing the file lt filename gt is the name of the executable file Figure 7 3 shows a sample system response to the readexe command fe cts 5 bn exe N Processing contents of 5 bn exe Module name krnl_bn exe Validating header checksum OK Validating image checksum OK Program execution address space Load Address 0x30300000 Size 767449 Bytes Entry point 0x00000000 PROM storage address space PROM Load address 0x00000000 Input file information Platform Key 0101000B BB M68000 MotherBoard FRE FRE2 FRE2_60 Work
314. uter Reset Commands and Respones ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 7 23 Table 7 5 Router Diagnostic Commands and Respones n 7 25 Table 7 6 IP Subeommand Meanings sss scerecnssaorranint qarees lieraasanih annua 7 57 Table 7 7 Fog DESNO aia OE E EASE EEE 7 58 Table 7 8 Simplified AS Pattern Matching Syntax sireiisssriiisissnicnnirnaninnasis 7 66 Table 7 9 Simplified AS Pattern Matching Examples ccccccsseeeeereeesseeeeeeees 7 67 Table 7 10 Protocol Letters and Meanings ETE PE A E TA 7 73 THe zii IP Subcommand Meanings siririna 7 77 Table 7 12 Options for ip routes CommaNd sessiriorissarisiiseiniadiiannaininniain innana 7 78 Table 7 13 Technician Interface Access Levels ree reer arain Ar a 7 84 Table 8 1 Aliases for Debugging Network Problems s ceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 10 Table B 1 Option Flags for the Xmodem Command ccccecetecceesteeeeteeeeesseeesseeee B 6 Table C 1 Syslogd Error Levelg eda ceca sod inceeeaccncansesaieanengnct aane ae arr aas Anan C 43 308657 14 00 Rev 00 xvii Preface The Technician Interface is a command line interface that lets you manage Nortel Networks routers You can use the Technician Interface to install a router maintain or diagnose router operation and monitor and configure certain basic router functions Before You Begin If you are responsible for installing or maintaining a Nortel Networksrouter using Nortel Ne
315. uters that require the highest level of protection from unauthorized Telnet access to the Technician Interface To support Technician Interface login via SecurID you must have a Security Dynamics SecurID ACE server system installed on your IP network Routers with the SecurID ACE client enabled communicate with the SecurID server during each user authentication sequence For more information about SecurID server systems contact your Nortel Networks sales representative SecurlD Login and PIN Assignment Dialog This section describes more fully the dialog that may occur when you try to login to a router configured with SecurID client software Normally you can open a Technician Interface session as long as you enter a valid PASSCODE your PIN followed by the current cardcode If you do not have a valid SecurID PIN when you attempt the login you may receive another series of prompts for automated PIN assignment Note The SecurID administrator for your network must first configure the SecurID system to allow you to receive a PIN through the SecurID client software on the router 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Introducing the Technician Interface Figure 1 1 shows the complete authentication procedure and dialog you may encounter when attempting a login to a router configured with SecurID client software Whenever you enter information that the SecurID client considers incorrect you receive more prompts until you log in successfully or u
316. ve message This message appears if the system receives an IPX reply packet from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 is alive e Adoes not respond message This message appears if the IPX address of the target device is resolved but the system does not receive an IPX reply packet from the target device within the lt timeout gt allowed A sample message follows IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 does not respond e Atarget address is unreachable message This message appears if the local Nortel Networks router cannot find the specified network address in its table of IPX networks IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 is unreachable 308657 14 00 Rev 00 3 15 Using Technician Interface Software e An invalid parameter specified message This message appears if the network or host address is all Os all Fs or not a valid IPX address A sample message follows IPX ping invalid parameter specified e A resource error message This message appears if the router cannot allocate a buffer for the request because none are available A sample message follows IPX ping Examples ping ipx 0xAB12 0xCD1234 ping ipx 0xAB12 0xCD1234 t3 r8 resource error Pings the device at the IPX address 0xAB12 0xCD1234 and waits up to 5 seconds default for a response The console displays one of the following messages IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1234 is alive IPX ping OxAB12 0xCD1
317. vent messages logged on slots 1 to 4 Syslog ignores all other event messages To filter events for a specific slot set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd to the desired slot number Set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd to the same number For example to forward only event messages logged on slot 2 enter 2 as the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd and as the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd If you do not want to filter messages by slot numbers accept the lower and upper bound default values of 0 Command set wfSyslogEntFitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 14 gt MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 3 2 15 3 1 10 308657 14 00 Rev 00 C 41 Using Technician Interface Software Parameter Attribute Name Attribute Number Default Range Function Instructions Command MIB Object ID Slot Upper Bound wfSyslogEntFltrSlotUppBnd 11 0 0 to 14 Along with the Slot Lower Bound this parameter specifies a slot number or range of slot numbers Syslog forwards to the remote host associated with this filter messages logged only on the slots you specified Consider the location of each router in an ASN chassis as a numbered slot To specify a range of slots set the value of this parameter to the high number in the range Also set the value of wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowBnd Slot Lower Bound to the low number of the range Any range you sp
318. w on circuit 5 also running DVMRP The slot has outgoing circuit 2 running DVMRP with a TTL threshold value of 1 and outgoing circuit 4 running MOSPF with a TTL threshold value of 2 The slot mask shows that only slot 3 has outgoing circuits For more information about the Multicast Table Manager see Configuring IP Multicasting and Multimedia Services OSPF Link State Database With the ip command you can examine e The entire contents of the router s OSPF Link State Database OSPF LSDB e A subset of the detailed contents of the router s OSPF LSDB To view the OSPF LSDB enter the ip command using the following syntax ip cache ospf_Isdb lt A a gt s A invokes the complete OSPF LSDB for all OSPF areas known to the router 20 lines maximum per advertisement a is the address of the OSPF area associated with the LSDB you want to view S is the slot number associated with the LSDB you want to view t is the OSPF LS Type indicator stub router network summary link or external 7 74 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Determining Circuit Numbers Whenever you create a new circuit via the Technician Interface or the Configuration Manager tool the router operating system software GAME maps the circuit name you assign such as E21 to a circuit number such as 4 in the router s active MIB When you use the Technician Interface ip command to display data pertaining only to a specific circuit o
319. ware Proceed as follows to assign a password 1 Enter the following password Manager User The console displays one of the following messages Changing password for User Changing password for Manager Proceed to step 3 if you are logged in as Manager and you are changing the User password Otherwise enter the old password at the following prompt Old password If there is no old password press the Return key Enter the new password after the following prompt New Password The password may have 0 to 16 alphanumeric characters If you want to remove password protection press the Return key Repeat step 3 after the following prompt Retype new password The console displays one of the following messages User password changed Manager password changed If you enter the wrong password the console displays the following message User password not changed The Technician Interface prompt reappears If you do not reply to password prompts within about 30 seconds the system cancels the password command and displays the following messages Input timed out Command aborted The Technician Interface prompt reappears 7 42 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration Enabling and Disabling SecurlD Authentication This section describes how to enable or disable SecurID services from a Technician Interface session Note You enable disable SecurID services only from a router console an ASCII term
320. xadecimal characters 10 bytes A sample message follows OSI ping NSAP address is too short An OSI service is not running message This message appears if the OSI service is not enabled on the router A sample message follows OSI ping OSI service is not running A resource error message This message appears if the router cannot allocate a buffer for the request because none is available A sample message follows OSI ping resource error A system error message This message appears if the Technician Interface has failed A sample message follows OSI ping system error A lt y y y VeVi Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve Y gt is a bad NSAP address message This message appears if the NSAP address is more than 20 hexadecimal characters or contains nonhexadecimal characters A sample message follows OSI ping 4900040000a1121212000 is a bad NSAP address 3 18 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Examples ping osi 49000400000a12121200 ping osi 49000400000a1 2121200 t3 r8 Using Operating Commands Pings the device at the NSAP address 49000400000a12121200 and waits up to 5 seconds default for a response The console displays one of the following messages OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 is alive OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 does not respond OSI ping 49000400000a12121200 is unreachable Pings the device at the NSAP address 49000400000a12121200 eight successive times and waits up to 3 seconds for a resp
321. xe Model 5380 5580 and Motorola CPU 5780 routers Caution The FRE modules can simultaneously load different images or configurations if you have alternative versions of the boot or configuration file We recommend that you have only one version of each on the router Assign new names to alternative versions 4 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 Managing a Nonvolatile File System Naming Files Rules and Conventions The rules for naming files are as follows You must specify the volume location slot number of any file you reference and of any file you create The sections that follow detail the syntax requirements including the slot number specification for each command File names must start with an alphabetical character The remaining characters must be alphanumeric and may also include the underscore _ character and dot character Spaces are not allowed File names can consist of one to 15 characters We recommend a limit of 8 characters however to ensure that all operating systems that we support can recognize the names File extensions are optional and must be preceded by a file name and a dot The total Technician Interface limit for the file name and file extension is 15 characters including the dot We also recommend the following conventions when naming files so that you can easily distinguish files by type Use the exe file extension for router software images for the FRE and Motorola modules BLN B
322. y define an event number or event number range If you defined an event number or number range Syslog ignores any severity mask for this filter To define by severity levels the event messages you want Syslog to select and forward to a specific remote host enter the following set wfiSyslogEntFltrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSevMask lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt fwitd gt commit c To also define by slot number s the event messages you want Syslog to select and forward to a specific remote host enter the following set wfSyslogEntFlitrEntry wfSyslogEntFlitrSlotLowBnd lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 14 gt set wfSyslogEntFlitrEntry wfSyslogEntFltrSlotLowUpp lt host_IP_address gt lt entity_code gt lt filter_index gt lt 0 14 gt commit Note Although the valid range for the slot lower and upper boundaries is 0 to 14 specify only values within the range of actual slot numbers for the router model you are configuring Otherwise the filter will not transition to an active state 4 Define how router event message severity levels and UNIX system error levels map to one another In most cases you accept the default mapping and go to Task 7 Otherwise continue with the following instructions to customize the message mapping Enter at the Technician Interface prompt the command line s appropriate for the message mapping s
323. you need more information about how to open a Technician Interface session with the router 4 To update a boot PROM enter prom w lt volume_no gt lt Boot_PROM_source_file gt lt slot_ID gt For example prom w 2 freboot exe 3 Note Once you enter the prom command it must run to completion The control c abort command is disabled for the duration of the prom command execution to allow it to run to completion Upgrading takes from 2 to 10 minutes per PROM Verifying takes up to 2 minutes per PROM 5 To update a diagnostics PROM enter prom w lt volume_no gt lt Diag_PROM_source_file gt lt slot_ID gt For example to upgrade the diagnostics PROMs in slots 2 through 5 enter prom w 2 frediag exe 2 5 Caution When upgrading PROMs with new software upgrade all slots that contain FRE modules to avoid a mismatch of software More examples of command lines appear at the end of this section 7 36 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration 6 To verify successful completion of a PROM upgrade enter prom v lt volume_no gt lt Diag_PROM_source_file gt lt slot_ID gt For example for a boot PROM enter prom v lt volume_no gt freboot exe asnboot exe anboot exe lt slot_ID gt For a diagnostics PROM enter prom v lt volume_no gt frediag exe asndiag exe andiag exe lt slot_ID gt The system verifies that the PROM image on a designated flash volume
324. yslog Enable C 28 Syslog Log Poll C 30 Trace Map C 45 Warning Map C 44 partition command 4 19 password access 1 3 assigning a 7 41 command 7 42 for new systems 1 4 setting timeout for 2 13 path trace report 3 8 3 11 pausing and scrolling the screen 3 2 308657 14 00 Rev 00 ping command AppleTalk 3 23 to 3 25 APPN 3 26 to 3 28 IP 3 7 to 3 10 IPv6 3 11 to 3 13 IPX 3 14 to 3 16 IPX NLSP response 3 14 OSI 3 17 to 3 19 VINES 3 20 to 3 22 pinging a remote device 3 7 to 3 27 platform key 7 31 port name displaying 2 7 number displaying 2 6 parity setting 2 9 type displaying 2 8 processor modules 4 4 product support xxvi prom command 7 28 7 32 verifying and upgrading software on 7 32 protected access via password 1 3 via SecurID 1 3 publications hard copy xxv Q QENET underflow errors 7 55 R readexe command 7 28 to 7 32 record command 7 53 recording console messages to a file 7 53 repeat command 1 3 3 repeating a Technician Interface command 3 3 3 4 reset command 7 9 to 7 10 7 21 restart command 7 20 router software images 4 4 308657 14 00 Rev 00 routes listing IP and BGP 7 57 listing IPv6 7 77 S s5000 exe image 4 9 s5000boot exe 4 9 s5000boot exe PROM image file 4 9 s5000diag exe PROM image file 4 9 save aliases command 8 8 save command 2 4 save config command 6 9 save log command 5 7 saving the log automatically 5 9
325. ze of the message in kB However the file system volume flash card where the ti_notice txt file resides must have enough contiguous free space to accommodate your message Depending on the setup of a user s console device or Telnet application the topmost lines of a long pre login message may scroll out of view For this reason we recommend that you limit the length of your message to less than 20 lines 3 Save ti_notice txt on your workstation or PC 4 Use TFTP to copy ti_notice txt to the router default file system volume Whenever someone attempts to log in to the router the message appears on the router local console display or the remote user s Telnet screen Customizing the Technician Interface Welcome Message You can modify or replace the login message Welcome to the lt router_model gt Technician Interface according to the needs of your organization or network site The Technician Interface software invokes the message from an ASCII text file named ti_msg txt To replace or customize the Welcome message on a particular router 1 Back up or copy ti_msg txt to another file name such as ti_msg txt orig on the router You may want to restore the default Welcome message at some later time 308657 14 00 Rev 00 System Administration 2 Use TFTP to copy ti_msg txt from the router to your UNIX workstation or PC 3 Open ti_msg txt on your workstation or PC 4 Edit the default Welcome message or ent

Avaya Using Technician Interface Software User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents